MENU

Where the world comes to study the Bible

12. 赦罪的權柄(馬太福音9:1-8)

Related Media

我們從過往研讀馬太福音已看到傳道者強調耶穌的權柄。1   在馬太福音第九章開端的事件,我們看到祂有赦罪的權柄。

按我們過往研讀經文文本的方法,已看到經文的對話是詮釋的重要元素;在這課很短的敘事經文,我們可以再次看到,因耶穌詳細解釋醫治和赦罪的關連。

在過往研讀經文時,我們亦已留意文本故事內記述的不同角色。這段經文的角色包括:耶穌、祂的追隨者、祂幫助的人和祂的敵人。研讀經文文本時,必須留意耶穌的話是對誰說的,而整件事件最終的對象是誰。這些話可能是矯正或責備反對他的人,但整件事情是要說服人祂擁有權柄。因此,應用這課經文時,我們可以根據故事中各組人物中的代表角色,不難知道我們對耶穌該作出或不該作出怎樣的回應。

和往常一樣,我們必須在舊約的背景下看這些事件,因為耶穌到世上來是為了履行它們。這段經文的重點是赦罪,這是重大事件,因神在舊約已清楚表明只有神有赦罪的權柄。這幫助我們明白律法師的反應,以及為何有這含辯證性質的神蹟。

閱讀經文

9:1 耶穌上了船,渡過海,來到自己的城裏。 2 忽然有人用擔架抬着一個癱子來到耶穌跟前,耶穌見他們的信心,就對癱子說:「兒子,放心吧!你的罪得赦了。」

3 就有幾個律法師心裏說:「這個人說僭妄的話了!」

4 耶穌知道他們的心意,就說:「你們為甚麼心懷惡念呢? 5 我說『你的罪得赦了』或說『你起來行走』,那一樣容易呢? 6 這是要叫你們知道人子在地上有赦罪的權柄。」就對癱子說:「起來,拿你的擔架回家去吧!」

7 那人就起來,回家去了。 8 羣眾看見都害怕,就歸榮耀與神,因為他將這樣的權柄賜給人。

符類福音的平行經文

這事件也在馬可福音2:1-12記載。馬可告訴我們,當人們知道耶穌來到迦百農時,就有許多人聚集,擠得連門前都沒有空地,耶穌就對他們講道。有四個人抬了一個癱子來,因為人多,不得近前,就把耶穌所在的房子,拆了房頂,既拆通了,就把癱子連所躺臥的褥子都縋下來。耶穌見他們的信心,就對癱子說:「小子,你的罪赦了。」

馬可還解釋律法師因相信只有神有赦罪權柄,而認為耶穌僭妄。

馬可和馬太使用相近的結束:耶穌所說的話和行的神蹟;馬可在結束時表達人們對神蹟感到驚訝,他沒有包括馬太的解釋 – 神將赦罪的權柄賜給人。

耶穌的教導和故事的重點,兩者都相同。馬可聚焦在把癱子抬到耶穌跟前的人的信心;馬太則主要展示耶穌的權柄。

這個故事也在路加福音5:17-26記載。路加記述不單有律法師,還有法利賽人在場,他們從加利利、猶大地和耶路撒冷各地而來。他們為何而來?明顯是要親自看看加利利到底發生了甚麼事。為何遠至耶路撒冷都聽到消息?假如你按時序看看耶穌的生平,你會發現這事件之前,耶穌潔淨長大痲瘋的人(馬太福音8:2-4; 馬可福音 1:40-45和路加福音 5:12-16),並指示他按記載在利未記的摩西律法,往耶路撒冷給祭司察看;即耶穌公開宣告祂能潔淨患大痲瘋的,並滿足了律法的要求。這猶如發出個人邀請,因此這些人來看祂是誰。

法利賽人和律法師經常合作。法利賽人敬虔,他們主要是社會上的普通人,猶如藍領工人。他們對信仰充滿熱情,特別是聖潔、潔淨,安息日和十一奉獻的條文。他們愛神,相信神蹟、天使和復活,並試圖遵循聖經的傳統,他們與撒都該人和聖殿的等級制度格格不入;但律法師(其中一些成員是法利賽人)是負責這些事情的當權者,因此馬太對他們在場更感興趣。

經文結構

這段經文同樣有清晰的結構:與癱子相遇、律法師的質疑、耶穌回答時所作的教導和完成神蹟。第一部份是耶穌向癱子所說的話,第二部份是律法師心裡說的話,第三部份是耶穌向律法師所說說話,最後是耶穌向癱子所說的話。我們可以把結構如下圖表達出來:

癱子被帶到耶穌跟前,耶穌對他說他的罪赦免了

律法師不悅,認為耶穌僭妄

耶穌責備他們想法不正確,並說人子有這權柄

耶穌醫治癱子,並叫他拿擔架回家去

假如你有把故事流程化為圖表習慣,你會更清楚看到故事是怎樣結合在一起。在這個故事中包含另一個故事,主幹是耶穌和癱子的對話,並醫治他,但當中卻插入向敵對者的邪惡思維作出回應,以解釋神蹟的重點。耶穌使用這神蹟和對祂僭妄的指控,宣告祂有赦罪的權柄。祂這樣做顯示最基本的需要是赦罪,而不是醫治。

主題

這篇章的重點是耶穌有赦罪的權柄。我們怎樣知道?這裡給出答案的一部分,他有治病權柄。

這引發一個研讀時需要處理的神學基礎問題,或許在耶穌對律法師說話時作處理。治病和赦罪有甚麼關連呢?也許更基本的問題是疾病、死亡和罪惡之間有甚麼關連呢?這可能會成為一個相當深入的研究,你需要找一個時間處理。聖經神學在這一課題將為你提供基本討論基礎。

總括來說,聖經教導世界上所有疾病、痛苦、污染和死亡都是罪惡臨到世上的結果。從罪惡進入世界開始,詛咒已被宣告是叛逆永活的神的自然結果,世界和人類從那時起已被污染。生命被創造的地方已被死亡統治,不論是身體或精神上的疾病都是死亡的一部份,人存在的特徵是痛苦,衝突,疾病和死亡。

現在的問題並非跛子是否一個犯更嚴重的罪的人,約伯記已告訴我們不是這樣的。生命上一個簡單的事實是我們都會患病,我們都會有這種或那種痛苦,嚴重的,也有慢性的疾病,最終我們都死亡。如果人類沒有被罪惡毀壞,這一切都不會出現;但它卻已出現了。耶穌來到世上解決這問題,祂承擔了我們所有罪惡和軟弱,承受我們的詛咒,一篇重要的經文以賽亞書第53章已作預言。祂為我們的罪犧牲祂的性命,背負我們的罪和軟弱(以賽亞書53:4)。

關鍵是,治愈癱子或使死人復活,表達了耶穌能夠處理罪的後果,那麼通過赦罪,祂能處理疾病的根源。對耶穌而言,治病和赦罪是祂使命的兩面;而赦罪更為重要。

分析經文

這段經文有多個分段方法,也可得出多個大綱。我選擇把它分為三部份,把律法師的質疑和耶穌的解釋作為中間部份。

I. 穌赦免癱子的罪太福音9:1-2)。馬太只記敘耶穌上了船,渡過海,來到自己的城裏 – 迦百農(正如馬可和路加提醒我們)。

如果你希望將其他福音書的背景合併,耶穌所在的那間屋擠滿了人。我們並沒有被告知那是怎樣的屋,但耶穌並非屋主,所以我們有理由相信那是彼得的家。耶穌在迦百農時可能與彼得同住。但不管是在那裡,這些房屋的屋頂通常都是用木、樹枝和泥土造的,當風雨把泥土沖走,便會出現漏水情況,因此每隔相當的日子,便需要修理屋頂,這是屋主的定期工作。我們不能肯定這是否當時的情況,若然,那便不難理解那些人怎樣上屋頂,把木和樹枝移走,打開屋頂。2  2 也不難想像有碎片落在屋裡聚集的人群中,癱子才被縋到耶穌跟前。這些人決心要把癱子帶到耶穌跟前,他們相信這樣做,癱子會被治癒。這也是馬可所記載的。

馬太只簡單告訴我們有人用擔架抬着一個癱子來,耶穌見到他們的信心。這些人把癱子帶到耶穌跟前是信心的明證。這行動顯示這四個人和癱子相信耶穌能把他治癒。

耶穌透過祂的話回應他們的信心:「兒子,放心吧!你的罪得赦了。」這裡有兩件事情值得探討,首先是問候語:「兒子,放心吧!」較古老的英文譯本譯作“Be of good cheer, son.”這話直譯出來是「祝你開心」。有人會說,單看他的情況,他沒有甚麼值得開心的。

但更重要的是法利賽人或律法師不會向癱子說這話,他們可能因癱子的病,不假思索便把他列為「罪人」。按他們思維所得的結論:若這人是義人或敬虔的人(像他們),便不會落到這境況。他們很可能非常樂意見到這些人毀了耶穌的教導。

可是,我們對律法師和法利賽人說太苛刻的話前,我們得反省,我們自己的思想其實和他們一樣呢。我們這麼屬靈,如我們當時在那個場合出現,我們也會和他們有相同的反應。就是今天,當我們見到有人受苦,我們也會想他們欠缺信心,或罪導致他們的困境。我們可未曾想過對他們說「祝你開心」吧!

但是耶穌接著說:「你的罪赦免了。」如許的話!多戲劇性!房子裡的人沒人料到耶穌會說這話。假如這是真確的,那當然有無數的理由值得年輕人鼓舞或放心;但這話不單是為了祝福和鼓勵癱子,並使所有關於他那狀況的意見無效。假如他們認為癱子因他的罪,而導致他癱瘓,現在,他的罪被赦免了。

在舊約,祭司在聖所獻祭時,可以傳達神的寬恕。不過利未記只簡單地記載敬拜者承認自己的罪,並獻上祭物贖罪,他的罪蒙赦免(4:26);神赦免人的罪(參詩篇32);祭司只有在看到悔悟,犧牲或恢復健康之後才能將這美善的話傳達給真正的懺悔者。也有在別的時候,先知給罪人宣告神已經把罪赦免了(參撒母耳記下12:13)。可是,耶穌在這裡看見他們的信心,就宣告這人的罪赦免了,那是先於那人被醫治,先於在聖殿獻祭,甚或我們可以假設癱子還未說甚麼,他的罪得赦先於他說任何話。罪得赦免是基於癱子的信心,是他的信心救了他,是他的信心使他痊癒。他相信耶穌,希望被帶到耶穌跟前。然而,文本卻說耶穌見「他們的信心」;人們若因別人的信心而幫助那人,這也可以表達他們的信心,這也是在這裡發生的事情。

可是我們不能錯過這戲劇性事件的意義,就在那一刻,耶穌選擇在房子裡的眾人面前,做一件他們知道只有神能做的事 – 宣告癱子的罪赦免了。

II. 耶穌捍衛祂赦罪的權柄。(馬太福音9:3-5。首先,經文記載了律法師心裡所說的話:「這個人說僭妄的話了!」你可以在任何好的詞典中查閱「僭妄」這詞的不同意思,這有幫助。這詞的基本含意是以邪惡或不道德的方式代表神說話。其中一種方式是聲稱擁有神的身份和特權,這正是這裡指耶穌宣告祂能赦罪,即宣稱祂擁有神聖的身份。他們認為祂只是吹噓,說些不能證明的話,說些沒有人會挑戰的神聖說法,並不是真的。對他們來說這是僭妄的話,因只有神能赦罪;對他們來說,耶穌作了一些不該作的宣稱,一些絕不應作的事,這是他們的想法。

第二、耶穌責備他們的想法,並為祂的行為辯護。祂的責備很直接:「你們為甚麼心懷惡念呢?」祂知道他們在想什麼,足可讓他們停下來。因耶穌知道他們的教導和他們到來的原因,所以猜到他們的想法並不太難。這修辭的問題意味他們沒有理由認為祂是邪惡的,耶穌把他們的想法推倒。

接著耶穌向他們發問:「我說『你的罪得赦了』或說『你起來行走』,那一樣容易呢?」這問題即時使他們明白罪與受苦相關。馬太福音(8:17)已經提醒讀者以賽亞書53章這著名的篇章,彌賽亞透過死亡為罪付贖價;但以賽亞書53章清晰地表達,彌賽亞的使命首先是處理痛苦,罪惡的因由,其次是治癒疾病。

耶穌治病並非簡單行神蹟,通常被定義為違返自然定律;祂通過這些醫治神蹟,顯示祂正在恢復那失落的秩序。疾病和死亡並非神創造的秩序,它們違返了神的創造。自然秩序是神創造的,但已被毀。耶穌能夠擺脫這個問題,首先處理罪惡,然後是其引致的結果。正如我們之前所說,祂在地上所行的神蹟,是他第二次來臨時的使命徵兆,到時祂會完全恢復那失落的創造秩序。

那麼應怎樣回答這問題?耶穌發問的很多問題旨在揭示真理,這問題也是如此。從務實的角度和感觀上,說「你的罪得赦了」更容易。誰知道?幾乎任何人都可以這樣說;但是,可以做甚麼別的事情來證明罪被赦免?而在神學意義上,也較容易這麼說,因為它照顧導致疾病的原因和疾病本身。若有人說:「拿起你的墊子走」,那麼,癱子最好照著做,否則說這話的人會被視為欺詐。

從另一個角度來說,律法師和法利賽人則認為罪被赦免是難以開口的話,因沒有凡人敢說這話,他們被這話絆倒。對他們來說,耶穌若簡單把那人治癒會較易接受,縱使這顯示祂有神的能力。

但耶穌不是要處理他們的不信。他回應癱子的信心。對耶穌來說,說「你的罪得赦了」容易些,因為他有赦罪的權柄,神蹟也把這權柄立即顯現出來。

III. 耶穌顯示祂有赦罪的權柄(馬太福音9:6-8。耶穌對他們說:「這是要叫你們知道人子在地上有赦罪的權柄…」就對癱子說:「起來,拿你的擔架回家去吧!」這話和祂的提問成對比。若說他的罪得赦較為容易,可讓這些人知道祂有赦罪的權柄。很明顯,治病的神蹟是為了向他們表明祂有赦罪的權柄。

有趣的地方是耶穌使用「人子」來稱呼自己。讓我們先簡單作解釋,這是耶穌用來顯示祂就是彌賽亞的稱謂(神學書籍有大量相關資料)。這稱謂出於但以理書7:13-14,經文述說但以理見有一位像人子的,駕著天雲而來,被領到亙古常在者面前,得了在萬物之上的權柄,全世界都敬拜祂。這些細節在這裡都很重要,若整個世界都敬拜祂,他顯然是神。作為神,祂可以做神所做的事情,包括赦罪。但按但以理的描述,祂駕著天雲而來,聖經以此作神審判的證據。若祂來審判世界,建立公義的國度,祂擁有法官寬恕或譴責的權柄。因此,人子的預言顯示彌賽亞有赦罪權。

沿著這些事件的發展,馬太福音在結束部份,大祭司要求耶穌起誓告訴他們,祂是否彌賽亞 – 神的兒子。耶穌對他說:「你說的是。然而,我告訴你們,後來你們要看見人子坐在那權能者的右邊,駕著天上的雲降臨。」(馬太福音26:64)。大祭司就撕開衣服,以僭妄入耶穌的罪;耶穌肯定祂確實是彌賽亞,是但以理預言的那位。如果我們向前推一步,把對話重寫,祂說:「你今天可能是我的法官,但當我駕雲而來的時候,我將成為你的法官。」審判的事全交與子(約翰福音5:22)。這是神的特權,作為法官,祂有赦罪的權柄。

因此耶穌醫治那人顯示祂是人子,有赦罪的權柄。如果祂能治病,祂也能治癒導致病的根源 – 罪。假如祂只赦罪,世人不會知道那人是否罪得赦免。現在,他們知道了。

馬太還報告了這人起來回家去了。羣眾看見都害怕,就歸榮耀與神,因為他將這樣的權柄賜給人。雖然耶穌清楚地表明祂有這權柄,他們還未知道祂就是神,他們仍以為祂只是凡人,這情況我們能夠理解。那人被醫治,而他們也為此讚美神。我們不知道律法師和法利賽人是否加入了讚美,還是懷著不滿而去;縱使他們當中有如尼哥底母(約翰福音第3章)會仔細思考這些事情,但後者較具他們的特色。

與舊約的關聯

我將在此重複上面討論過的關鍵段落,以賽亞書53章必須充分研讀,那兒記載了彌賽亞的使命:祂為世人的罪和軟弱獻上自己的生命。耶穌的死,不僅為罪付贖價,並且能消除世間所有罪惡的影響。祂第一次來臨時處理罪惡的問題,當祂第二次來臨時,祂會處理罪的詛咒。

但以理書第7章對明白人子的異象十分重要。這可以和別的彌賽亞相關經文連在一起,例如但以理書9:24-25連接了神贖罪的計劃,透過彌賽亞被棄絕,帶來永恆的公義,而且以賽亞書第9章還賦予彌賽亞其他稱號,包括:「全能的神、永在的父…」

與新約的關聯

在這部份,我們也希望看看其他記載耶穌宣稱祂是神的經文,例如約翰福音10:30(在這段經文,猶太人拿石頭打祂);約翰福音8:58,耶穌宣稱「我是」的其中一項(猶太人也拿石頭打祂);耶穌宣稱是神最明確的證據是祂被釘十字架,因祂被控僭妄。

我們也可以在新約尋找有關在基督裡罪得赦免的經文,將他們和這事件聯繫。整部新約充滿了我們在基督裡罪得赦免、救恩和榮耀的盼望的經文。這課題可從以下的經文開始研究:約翰壹書1:9,羅馬書3:22-26,或彼得前書2:22-25等。

有關醫治的教導,我們可以查看叫我們為醫治代禱的經文,例如雅各書5:13-18。有關我們如何在復活中體驗到贖罪的全部好處,可參考哥林多前書15:35-58,約翰壹書3:1-3和羅馬書8:22,23等。

一旦確定了經文的主要教導,聖經中會找到一系列相關經文,研究他們可以填補敘述中所提出的教義。只要你願意,你可以繼續這個過程,因為有很多值得學習的地方。

結論和應用

故事的要點很清晰:耶穌有赦罪的權柄。故事的含義也很清晰:因為祂是神的兒子,祂是成了肉身的神,祂是神與人同在。律法師明白這是什麼意思,所以他們完全清楚祂所宣稱的是什麼。如果他們不相信祂,那麼他們必認定祂是僭妄的。但是,如果祂是神的兒子,那麼他們在這裡和以後對耶穌的指責,便是僭妄的。

這個故事也建立了罪與苦難之間的關係。這我已處理了,所以在這裡只順帶一提。

最後,完全的治療(靈性上的寬恕和身體康復,無論是現在,還是那將要來的生命)基於信。這些人相信耶穌和祂的能力,他們知道如果他們能把癱子送到耶穌跟前,他就會被治癒。

應用方面,我們肯定會認同憑著信抬癱子到耶穌跟前的那些人和癱子的信心。人要罪得赦免,必須憑信心來到耶穌面前,並相信祂會赦免我們和得到改善。要得到身體的恢復和靈性的健康,我們也必須奉耶穌的名禱告。祂可以按我們所求成就,醫治我們和我們今生為他們代禱的親友;但終極的醫治要等到復活時才會出現。耶穌行這些神蹟是要證明祂的能力,並作為未來事物的保證。我們這些相信基督耶穌,並已從祂得到罪的赦免的人,知道在未來,祂會恢復創造秩序,消除詛咒,並且在祂裡面的會成為完全的人。這是贖罪的全部果效,是榮耀的盼望。


1 「傳道者」這個詞與「福音」有關,研讀福音書時,亦指福音書的作者。這詞的意思是將福音帶給他人的人,在後世則被引用為傳福音的屬靈事工。

2馬可只說他們「拆了房頂」,但路加說他們從瓦間把他連褥子縋到當中,除非路加只是使用外邦讀者能理解的詞彙,否則屋子的結構可能比一般屋子複雜。

犹大书注释

Related Media

托马斯  康斯塔布尔博士

2017 版

历史背景

传统上,学者都认为耶稣的同母异父的弟弟犹大(太十三 55, 可六 3 )是这书信的作者。他也是第一世纪耶路撒冷教会领袖雅各的弟弟(犹1,徒十五13)。虽然近年来也有学者质疑这说法,但他们却不能证实这是错误的。1 按此而言,犹大(希腊文是 Judas , 希伯来文是 Judah ,意即赞美)是一名犹太的基督徒,他和雅各同样是一名希腊化的加利利犹太人,用高雅的希腊文写成这书信。故此我们可以预期,犹大引用希伯来经文而非如其他新约作者引用七十士译本。

耶稣按肉身的兄弟,在耶稣在世传道的日子并不信祂(约七 5 )。我们也可以假设犹大也和雅各一样,在耶稣复活后才信的(林前十五7)2 。耶稣的兄弟和其他人在耶路撒冷聚集在一起,一起祷告等待圣灵的降临(徒一14)。耶路撒冷教会的人都熟悉他们(林前九5)。

因犹大经常引用旧约经文,我们相信这封信是写给一群熟悉旧约圣经的犹太人。这书信的内容对所有基督徒都是真确的,对犹太基督徒尤甚。因此,很多学者都相信这书信原本的收信人是一群犹太的基督徒。

「... 从信的内容来看,这不是一封给所有基督徒的大公书信,该以当地一群特定的信徒作为写作对象...」3

「关于谁是犹大书的收信人,按我们能够收集到的少许资料,相信生活在外邦的犹太基督徒群体是主要的收信人,但却不是唯一的收信人。」4

由于犹大是耶稣的弟弟,他可能活到第二世纪,这封书信的写作日期很难断定。公元66-70年犹太人叛乱之后,犹大若仍然生存,他可能在耶路撒冷或巴勒斯坦地以外生活。按书中有关假师傅和使徒的经文来看(第3-5节和17节),这可能是五旬节圣灵降临数年后的教会情况。犹大书和彼得书信都有很多近似的地方,因此估计犹大书和彼得书信是同期的作品,5 但这是没有确据的估计而已。比较可信是犹大在公元67-80年期间写成犹大书,那时他或许居住在巴勒斯坦以外的地方。6

虽然我们无法确定犹大书的写作日期和历史背景,但却没有影响这书的信息或价值。

犹大书比彼得后书有更属实的明证。」7

写作特色

很多学者都认为犹大书其实是一篇「书信形式的讲章」。8 假如犹大是站在他的读者面前传递这信息,这必然是一篇讲章。因他不能面对面给他的读者宣讲他的信息,所以他把信息以书信形式写出来。新约中使用书信形式的讲章还有雅各书、希伯来书和约翰壹书。

结构

好些研读犹大书的学生留意到,犹大书的基本写作结构是交错结构( chiastic structure ,或称扇形结构);他们可能找到不同的交错结构。9

写作目的

「贯穿这卷书的信息:提防叛教者。」10

「新约中只有少数书卷比犹大书对我们这世代有更多要说的话。」11

这封书信似是针对早期的诺斯底主义。

「在这里有多个发展为后期诺斯底主义的元素:崇尚知识作为从道德伦理中解放的藉口;高傲地对待『落后无知』的教会领袖;对天使学感兴趣、分党、纵欲。」12

大纲

I. 引言 1-2 节

II. 写信目的 3-4 节

III. 防避假师傅的警告 5-16 节

甲. 过去的错谬 5-7 节

1. 以色列人的例子 第5节

2. 天使的例子 第6节

3. 异教徒的例子 第7节

乙. 现在的错谬 8-16 节

1. 错谬的本质 8-9 节

2. 错谬的严重性 10-13 节

3. 错谬的后果 14-16 节

IV. 劝勉信徒坚守信仰 17-23 节

甲. 提醒信徒要记念使徒的警告 17-19 节

乙. 给信徒正面的劝勉 20-23 节

V. 结语 24-25 节

信息

犹大书的教导:我们必须忠于我们的信仰。这是从正面来说,可是,犹大所强调的,大部份是负面的,他警告离开从前一次交付圣徒的真道的危险(第3节)。犹大书的主题是叛教 – 离开真道。叛教并非论述救恩,而是顺服。基督徒离开信仰,可以和非基督徒般容易。有些年青的基督徒在专上学院或大学时期离开信仰后,可能永不回转。

「叛教」这词在基督教圈子时有所闻,意即离开信仰,并非指在某时刻的失脚(例如彼得在基督受审期间不认主)。叛教包含否认信仰的主要教义;「倒退」一般指道德或灵性热忱下滑,或许包含离开圣经的主要教导;「属肉体」指跟随感观肉欲,或许离开信仰。

犹大先为叛教下定义(第 4 节)。我相信第四节经文含明显递进,道出叛教的发展,从不敬虔到纵欲,最终否认信仰。「不敬虔」的人拒绝神的权威在他之上,他可以是信徒或非信徒,欠缺对神的崇敬,包括自决(按个人深思熟虑的意愿而行)。坎伯·摩根把叛教定义为「蓄意不敬虔」。13

下决定后,变节者以不敬虔作行为基础,出现离开神的表征。他纵欲,行为经常出现不羁,过度追求肉体的满足而不羞愧。叛逆从自决发展到道德领域。

接着,他用理性合理化自己的行为,说服自己所行是正确的,使充满罪疚感的良心禁声。结果,他找到方法说服自己颠倒是非,致使他否认神的道,认为神错了,而叛教者的话却「没有问题」;神说对的,他说「错」。他从自决,转为道德上的偏离,继而心智上偏离。这三方面都偏离了尽心、尽性、尽力爱神。

叛教者的出现意味教会出现了异端,其根源是个人生命中有某些范畴拒绝交给神。很多人都留意到叛教者从道德上的失脚,演变为不遵守教义,这是叛教者的特征。

随后,犹大说明叛教的本质和后果(第5-11节),他列举三个组别和三个人物作为例子。

组别#1:犹大使用以色列人在加低斯叛逆神的旨意,说明自决是叛教的根源(第五节),这事件导致叛教者提早死亡。叛逆的那一代不能进应许之地,他们在旷野漂流,最终死在旷野。

组别#2:不守本位的天使,显示道德上的叛逆(第六节)。他们叛逆的行为显示他们打从心底叛逆神,结果是永远拘禁。

组别#3:所多玛和蛾摩拉的叛逆性质是拒绝神给当地居民法律(第七节)。这些不敬虔的人以行动说出他们的生活方式是对的,而神是错的,这是理性上的谬误。叛逆的结果是面对终极审判。所多玛人起初瞎了,继而被杀。

个人#1:犹大使用「该隐」的例子描绘叛逆。该隐蓄意不顺服神给他的旨意(节11节),他是一个自以为义的人。

个人#2:犹大使用「巴兰」的例子描绘叛逆。巴兰向巴勒建议,引诱以色列人和摩押人行淫(节11节)。巴兰是一名极其贪婪的人。

个人#3:犹大使用可拉的例子描绘叛逆。可拉企图颠倒是非(节11节),并且十分自负。

总括来说:自义、贪心和自负显示叛教的不同阶段:自决、道德和理智。犹大在第12节和第13节还指出了叛教和叛教者的其他特质。犹大不愿意我们分辩不出离开真道的状况。

了解叛教者带来的祸害后,犹大给读者甚么劝勉呢? 他给予一个一般命令和一些特别诫命。

让我们先看看那一般命令(第3节)。「竭力为真道争辩」意即小心翼翼和坚决地作出努力。从接着的特别诫命,我们可学习该怎样做。

让我们先看看第20-23节的特别诫命:守这些诫命包括3件事:首先,「造就我们自己」(20节上)。这是恒常服从神而来的灵命成长,应对叛教者的自决问题。第二,「在圣灵里祷告」(20节下),即求神帮助,应对叛教者的道德问题。

第三,「仰望」未来(21-22节),这需要清楚地聚焦终极的存有。应对叛教者的理智问题。当我们存着盼望,我们会作出正确的抉择,例如:为将来而非眼前的事物而活。若是这样,我们常在神的爱中。

对犹大来说,「竭力为真道争辩」最佳的表达方法,是个人对神忠信至死不渝,作信实的模范。他脑海中未有护教或基督教证据,当然有为此竭尽全力的人。

应用方面,让我提出两个问题并作出回答。

第一:我们要争辩的「真道」是甚么? 那是「一次交付圣徒的真道」,即神在圣经里的特别启示,真道的中心是耶稣基督,是神给教会的大使命(太二十八19-20)。

第二:为「真道」作甚么争辩? 人必须自愿服在神的权柄下,行事为人与祂的旨意和谐,坚信祂的启示与人的理性并无冲突。这是给每个基督徒的呼召。

纵使现今世代叛教的不少,保持对神信实是可行的。犹大书帮助我们忠于神。既然犹大给信徒写这封警告信,即基督徒作出叛教行为是可能发生的。14愿主对我们每个人说:「做得好,我又良善、又忠心的仆人。」15

注释

I. 引言 1-2 节

犹大在信的开端首先介绍自己,也祝愿读者在神的祝福里,预备他们接受这封信的信息。

第1节              「这卷为叛教作定义的书卷,所使用的名字让我们联想到世上最恶名昭彰、无出其右的叛徒。」16

这卷书的作者「犹大」,谦卑地表达他的身份。他大可以自称为耶稣的弟弟,但他却选择以他和基督的属灵关系(如雅一1),自称作基督的「仆人」(希腊文 doulos ),直译是奴隶的意思。

「作者自称是雅各的弟兄,这称呼是独一的。新约圣经中并没有其他作者使用家庭关系来介绍自己。」17

「也许犹大并非教会领袖,他的名字不单不曾在使徒行传中被提及,也没有在别的新约书卷中出现;因此他以在耶路撒冷教会当领袖的雅各来介绍自己,也是很自然的事。」18

犹大使用了三个不同的身份来称呼他的读者,他是最早使用三重身份组合的作者,成了这封书信的特色,也表现出犹大的思想精密完备。他的称呼包含过去圣灵给圣徒的呼召(第3节)、现在在父神的爱中(「在父神里蒙爱」,参第21节)和圣子从现在直到永远的保守(「为耶稣基督保守的人」,参第14,21节)。

「对神的呼召、爱和保守的认识,为身处叛教滋扰的信徒带来保证和平安。」

「犹大对收信人的每一个称呼,都遥指信中的内容:被召暗指『同得救恩』(第3节);神的爱则在第21节提及;为基督保守的人则暗示『仰望我们主耶稣基督的怜悯,直到永生。』(第21,24节)。」19

「保守」是这书的钥字,原文总共出现了五次(第1节,第6节两次,第13节和第21节,和合本分别译作保守、守、拘留和存留)。

「 虽然犹大坚持人的合作对成全恩典工作很重要,但他没有一刻忘记 从灵性角度来说 ,我们的救恩是领受得来的! 」20

第2节               按我们犯罪的情况,我们需要神的「恩典」。我们被那难以察觉的引诱围绕着,它给我们不停的刺激,我们极需要神所赐的「平安」;我们需要神的「爱」给我们保守和勉励去打那属灵的争战。犹大书的读者十分需要这些帮助去面对假教师的影响,他接着便讨论这些影响。

「这些并不是自自然然地拥有的基督徒美德,而是神的礼物。作者祈求这些美德厚厚地赐予收信人。虽然是礼物,神的打造和赐予,转化成人的品格。」21

II. 写信目的 3-4 节

犹大解释他写信的目的,用以带出信的内容,让读者明白这课题的迫切性。

第3节               很多追随圣灵引领的牧者,与犹大有「同感」:谈论救恩和一些正面的事情是一件乐事;不过也有一些情况迫使我们提出一些警告。这些信息因涉及一些负面的事情而使人不悦,不过神的子民应为这些警告而感恩。

「罪恶促使好的法律规条出现,因此引致危险的错误,也给予正确防卫真理的机会。」22

交付圣徒的信仰是神的特殊启示,已包含在圣经和使徒传扬的道(加一 23 ,提前四 1 );犹大的读者需要努力持守这信仰,犹如争取冠军的运动员辛勤练习去战胜挑战者(提前六 12 ,提后四 7-8 ,彼后一 5 )。

「翻译作『竭力』的希腊文( epagonizesthai )是一个复合不定式的字,这个字在新约圣经中只在这里出现了一次。这个字的动词形式 (agonizomai) 可解作「疼痛难忍」。这动词通常用于摔跤比赛中努力挣扎去克服对手。它也普遍地在冲突,竞赛,辩论,或诉讼等情况被使用,指一个人要耗尽一切精力去争取胜利。」23

这个复合动词所表达的图画,是一个人表明立场来捍卫和保留对手想要抢走的东西。24

「不消说,这些努力挣扎的性质是合乎道德和具说服力的。信徒被禁止使用武力:当彼得企图拔出刀来去保护耶稣时,耶稣在忧伤中谴责彼得,并叫他收刀入销;并表明祂的追随者不可为祂动刀枪。」25

「犹大写这封信有两个重点:他希望收信人不会因假师傅的误导而走上歧途。他祷告祈求他们竭力持守当初交付给他们的真道。」26

「信仰在世上的最后争辩并不是言语上的争辩,而是以生命来演绎信仰。」27

「虚假的自由主义和假人道的软弱,同样是错误的。」28

「在犹大时期,叛教只如手掌大小的一片云,但今天却像龙卷风席卷全球。」29

这节使用「一次交付」来强调这信仰的规范性和不可改变的性质。

第4节               这节的「有些人」和第三节的「圣徒」成为对比。这些人是「偷着」进到教会(如彼前二1所描述)。约翰则说很多「反基督的人」「从我们中间出去」(约壹二18-19);犹大却说「有些人」「偷着进来」。

「翻译作『偷着进来』的希腊文“ pareisedusan ”... 含有秘密地,悄悄地,巧妙地将一些毒素渗透入某个社群或情况中。」30

「... 这不单是一些外来的信条被带进教会,使教会感到困扰,而是异端入侵教会,将他们的教义带进来。」 31

「他们能够偷进来(犹第四节,另参加二4)是因为第一世纪的讲道者周游不同的地方讲道(徒十三15,约贰7-11节、十二宗徒训诲录 11.1-12; 13.1-7 ),当中也有些是群体中兴起的领袖,他们却将异教的教训静悄悄地带进教会(彼后二1,徒二十29-30,罗十六 17-18)。」32

「犹大书发人深省的地方是他继续争辩,由于偷偷走进来的使会众腐败,并蔓延至终极审判。但他清楚表达他们没有被捕,但经历不同的阶段直至那日。」33

这些人有如麦子中的稗子(参太十三24-25, 38-39)。

「犹大的敌对者是一群来到教会的宣教师,他们既有号召力、又充满魅力,但他们其实是反律法主义者。虽然他们自认是耶稣基督的追随者,但他们却拒绝所有的道德权威,无论是摩西律法(第8-10节)或基督亲自的教导(第4节、第8节)...

「拒绝道德权威的同时,他们纵欲,特别是与『性』相关的不端行为(第6-8节,第10节)。他们故意蔑视犹太人的道德标准,遵从异教的放任行为。」34

引文的作者使用 “ charismatics” 这个英文字时,是使用这字的一般含意:充满魅力和影响力,并不代表这些假师传相信圣灵的恩赐。

可能神早已知道这些敌对者的罪行、他们「早已」被「定罪」,只等将来才刑罚他们。另一观点指有别的作者已为叛教发出警告。35 原文 ”Prographo” 这字的意思是「预先写下」。

「定罪」是肯定他们所犯的罪的刑罚在前面等待他们。(太七15,可十三22,徒二十29-30 ,彼后第 2 章)

「『不敬虔』( 希腊文 asebeis )可说是这书的重点(参第15节和第 18节),就如以诺书一般。」36

当日犹大书的收信人能够透过两类特别的活动,看到这些不虔诚的人的本性。他们利用摩西律法给予人的自由(神的恩)作为纵欲、放荡的机会(反律法主义),这正是诺斯底派的罪行。在这节和这书的其他部份,都是受他们影响的明证。37 不过亦有人不同意这推论而有所争辩。38

其次,他们歪曲圣经启示的真理,这证明他们否认神和耶稣基督(约壹二 22-23,多一16)。按希腊文的文法结构,这节的「主宰」可以指神、也可以指耶稣基督。39 不过, 亦有很多学者认为犹大在这里指基督同时拥有这两个身份。40

「虽然他们自称是耶稣基督的追随者,犹大却说因他们拒绝基督对道德的要求,他们其实是拒绝基督作他们的主、也否定基督的权柄。」41

「因教会实际上拥护和包庇令人厌恶的不道德行为,这个国家(美国)的危险不断增加。」42

伴随着教义的偏差,他们时常为伦理和道德的罪恶辩护。

III. 防避假师傅的警告 5-16 节

「新约中并没有其他书卷好像这简短的犹大书,强烈谴责放荡的人和变节者。」43

甲 . 过去的错谬5 -7 节

犹大使用了三个过往失败的例子来警告读者离开真道的危险。圣洁的神公开审判作恶者并不是崭新的事情。

「为何这书信不按时序排列事件? 事出必有因,我们相信这排列方式是教导我们叛教的起因和结局。」44

1. 以色列人的例子第5节

在有礼貌的引言后(见彼后一12),犹大提醒读者他跟着所说的,是不争的事实。读者已知这些事例,因为神将一切的事透过圣经「一次交付圣徒」(第3节,参约壹二20-21)。

「讲道的设计并非在每篇讲章教导我们新的事物,而是『提醒我们』,好使我们把忘记了的事情再次记起。」45

神从埃及地拯救以色列人,使他们从为奴之地得自由,但他们却不愿意继续相信神的应许、不信祂的大能(参民十四11,申一32)。神给他们的审判是让那「不信的一代」在旷野倒毙,没有将变节者带到应许之地。因为犹大将假师传和那些被拯救离开埃及,却在旷野倒毙的以色列人作比较,所以说假师传中也有一些是基督徒,是合理的结论。他们同样没有持守所信的道,他们背弃神、叛逆神,神也会审判他们。

「以旷野的以色列人作暗喻,那些故意违反神的道而走上歧途的假师傅,明显是正统的基督徒。」46

也有释经家相信,犹大在这一节指那些从来没有相信耶和华的以色列人。47

其实,犹大的重点是要指出这些假师傅的行为,而不在于他们是否信徒。不管他们曾否得救,不信的结果总导致一些破坏。神肯定「摧毁」这些不信的人;如他们并未得救,将会永远被毁灭。

「犹大坚信我们的救主同时也是毁灭者。」48

2. 天使的例子第6节

有一群「天使」放弃了在神身边服事的恩宠(「不守本位」),他们离弃神(「离开自己的住处」),招致神的忿怒。有释经家相信犹大这里是暗指创世记六1-4的事件(参太二十二30)49。不过也有学者相信犹大指有些天使叛逆神,而最终撒旦被驱逐离开天堂。我个人认为第二个诠释较为合理。

「有些人抱怨圣经没有清晰和有系统地提供魔鬼堕落的资料,例如:原因、方式、时间、角色。但这些资料和我们没有关连,既无须轻轻带过,不提则更好。若圣灵为满足我们的好奇心而提供历史上的空白片段,是无效果的。」50

伪经以诺壹书描述了这场叛乱,因此有学者猜测犹大是引用这书。51 不过也有学者说犹大只是认定这书的内容。52 不管是那一个论点, 使用其他典籍作为参巧资料并不是不常有的(参徒十七28等)。虽然犹大引用以诺壹书,但他此举不应被看为以诺壹书因而自动成为神的启示。

犹大所说的叛逆「天使」,现正受捆绑(拘留在黑暗里),等待神的「审判」(参彼后二4),这可能是撒旦党羽以外的其他堕落天使,因撒旦的党羽 – 鬼,在现今世上还享有相当自由度。

「虽使用『永远』来形容拘留,其实只是暂时拘留(这些天使),等待最后审判。」53

犹大这例子说明了他那时代的变节者,他们放弃了服事神和荣耀神的优越地位和祝福,他们不守本位,因此被神严惩。与人不同,这些堕落天使未蒙拣选,不论好的或坏的天使,都「不能得救」,坏的天使肯定是「堕落的」,受到永远的惩罚。也许这里指神本意叫那些变节者得救,但他们却并未得着救恩,犹如前文所述的以色列人,虽然神希望他们成为属祂的子民。

「假如那些超越的受造物尚且受刑罚,更何况是犯罪的人呢! 」54

3. 异教徒的例子 第7 节

这个例子表明神刑罚(「永火」)那些不道德和犯奸淫的人,可是犹大时代的假师傅却认为行这些事是他们的自由。犹大的例子:神命令用「火」烧毁平原上那两个城市,火是神刑罚的工具;同样地,那些无视神旨意的假师傅也会受永火的刑罚(参启二十15)。55 在这里,犹大似是暗指那些假师傅并不是得救的信徒。

这里的每一个例子都突显假师傅的不同错谬。这是唇徒(或许是真信徒)所犯的叛逆罪行。若部份假师傅是信徒,那「永火」所指的必有别于「地狱」,因信徒不会下地狱。假师傅高傲地离开了本来所拥有的超越地位,还参与异教徒的不道德行为。

「不管是谁、也不论在甚么情况下犯罪,污秽和叛逆都是令人发指的,都会受到神的责罚。」56

「当我们检视这些过去的例子,我们会发现它们并不是按时序列出来... 为甚么不按时序列出各个例子呢? 我们相信作者是要让我们认识叛教的起点在那里、它的发展和带来的结果。叛教的起点是不信,不信引致叛逆神。我们不难预测不受约束带来不忠的后果。在我们的世代,这些事情岂不也是这样发生 – 不信、叛逆神、反抗他揭示的真理、不道德的行为、无法无天... 现今世代,我们也能寻见这些步骤。」57

它们也能在记载在的旧约的以色列人历史中找到。

乙 . 现在的错谬8-16节

犹大透过阐述他那个时代假师傅的错谬,给予他的读者更加强烈的警告。犹大的写作特色是先引用旧约的同类事件(第5-7, 11节)、先知的预言(第14-15, 17-18节),然后诠释假师傅应验了它们(第 8-10, 12-13,16和19节)。

「根据过往叛逆神的人的命运(第 5-7 节),犹大转而直接攻击那些正在冲击教会的叛徒。」58

1. 错谬的本质 8-9节

第8节               犹大在这里使用他刚说明的三个错谬来指责假师傅。它们是:欲望(第7节),叛逆(第5节)和不敬(第6节)。「作梦」很可能是指以下三个毛病:「污秽身体」、「轻慢主治」和「毁谤在尊位的」;也可能意味犹大指假师傅声称他们得到梦或启示来合理化自己的错谬。(参西二18)也许他们幻想自己拥有如神所拥有的权柄,在实权者之上的权柄。

「他们那扭曲的观点和不受约束的行为,使他们活在自己的幻想中,用虚幻来取代神的真理与公义的真实世界。」59

「今天,我们从教会的内部见证了毁坏 – 内在的问题。」60

第9节               假师傅的放肆与米迦勒处理撒旦的争议时所表现的顺服和敬虔,成了一个极大的对比。

「米迦勒似乎是位份最高的天使。」61

米迦勒和魔鬼周旋时一点也不轻率、不高傲,回答时也没有渺视或粗暴。那么,那些假师傅岂不应更加顺服神、尊敬神吗?

「他们使用优秀天使的语言;米迦勒也不会使用粗鄙的。」62

「假师傅和米迦勒的对比,重点并不是米迦勒不会对魔鬼无礼,也不是教导我们面对魔鬼时,要保持礼貌。这里的重点是米迦勒面对魔鬼的指控时,他并不以自己的权柄去反驳,纵使魔鬼恶意中伤他,因他明白自己并不是法官,便不使用自己的能力来驳回魔鬼的指控。米迦勒清楚知道只有主才是法官,他可以做的是请求主去审判撒旦的诽谤。这里的教导:人并非自主订定道德标准的权威,没有人可以为自己定下法则。」63

因魔鬼比我们强多了,与他直接驳斥或争辩是危险的。

犹大引用被视为摩西所写的伪经,只以此为历史事件。

「不论作者的资料是从那里得来的,圣灵能使他从中抽取出真实正确的资料。」64

2. 错谬的严重性 10-13节

第 10 节 假师傅选择了拒绝神的旨意。因此在这节「毁谤他们所不知道的」,很可能是指神的旨意(参林前二 7-16)。

「犹大和他的哥哥雅各一样,在这短短的书信中多次谴责和言语相关的罪行。」65

假师傅只知满足自己的私欲,私欲最终将他们摧毁。

「他们像野兽一般让本能主导他们的生活;他们拥抱世界的价值观念;他们的信条是依从肉体的需要。他们失去了一切属灵的触觉和洞察力,属灵的事对他们没有意义。对他们来说,唯一真实的、唯一的标准就是人类的本能与需要。」66

「犹大在这里将这两个问题连接在一起来说明一个真理:如果一个人持续地对属灵的事视而不见、对神的呼召听而不闻,并且以自己所定的准则来决定甚么是至善,最终他们会完全接收不到他们所唾弃了的呼召, 他们回到他们曾经因为寻找自由而离开的肉欲漩涡中。」67

「这等禽兽的结局是慢性自杀(有时并不缓慢)。」68

第11节               「他们有祸了」,这咒诅是他们的厄运(参赛五8-23,哈二6-20,太二十三 13-29;林前九16等),与祝福相反。

「叛教者遭厄运的结局,与信徒得到荣耀同样真确。」69

该隐选择了不敬虔、追随肉欲、暴力、贪婪和亵渎的道路,导致神的审判。他骄傲地认为可以透过自己所作的工和神建立关系;结果他成了一个充满仇恨的杀人凶手。

「... 这里是作出比较:该隐罪恶的根源是自私和嫉妒。」70

巴兰的错谬是与神的敌人妥协,并且教唆以色列人犯罪和行淫(民三十一16;彼后二15-16;启二14)。他教米甸人和以色列人私通,并引诱他们拜偶像(民三十一16)。巴兰的「方法」是使用自己的属灵恩赐谋利;他的「错谬」是误以为自己能逃罪。假师傅也放弃神的真理,他们向拜偶像与不道德的行为妥协。他们将会像巴兰在神的审判下灭亡(民三十一8)。

「巴兰代表两种情况:(甲)贪婪的人 – 为了钱财随时预备好犯罪。(乙)邪恶的人 – 教唆他人犯罪;这是最严重的罪行。犹大在这里宣告他那个时代邪恶的人,为利离开真道,并且教唆他人犯罪。」71

「巴兰是贪婪宗教领袖的人办,带领神的子民走歪路和行淫。」72

「驱使人走巴兰的路的事物很多,它们包括追求金钱、卓越、名誉、赞赏或权力。」73

「可拉的叛逆」是背叛神和神所指派的领袖 – 摩西和亚伦(民十六1-35)。同样地,假师傅叛逆神、也叛逆了神指派的领袖(使徒)。最终可拉被消灭了!

巴克莱指出异端诺斯底派其中一个派别「拜蛇教」(Orphites),奉该隐、巴兰和可拉为旧约的大英雄。74 巴克莱认为犹大是针对诺斯底派。

这三个比喻,每一个都指出不信的不同导向。

「该隐的例子是假信仰。他代表那些假敬虔,气焰嚣张和恶毒的变节者;巴兰代表贪婪的不信者,也表征变节者的贪婪、颠覆性和引诱人犯罪的特性;可拉则代表叛逆,为了争取权力而结党和煽动暴乱。」75

「该隐的背叛,是不愿服在神赐救恩的权柄下,他拒绝神要求他的血祭;巴兰不愿服在神将人分别出来的权柄,他为了利益而滥用神给他的恩赐,并诱使以色列民和其他种族混杂;可拉在事奉神上叛逆神,他否定摩西是神所委任的领袖, 并且企图篡夺摩西的权柄。」76

第12节               犹大在这节中,使用了五个大自然的例子来强调假师傅谬误的严重性(第12-13节)。

第一个例子:如果一条船在航行时,不慎遇上了「隐藏」在水面下的珊瑚「礁」,它可以把这条船底部撕下。同样地,假师傅也可以透过道德败坏,使一间教会沉沦、毁坏,使其他人在「道德伦理上触礁」。经文显示这些假师傅是信徒,最起码是唇徒,因为他们参与爱筵。爱筵是初期教会敬拜时信徒的亲密相交,不仅一起聚餐,当中还有擘饼的仪式(参林前十一17-22)。这节『只知餧养自己』突显变节者的自我中心(参结三十四2, 8;赛五十六11;约十12-13)。

「犹大似乎意味这些人坚持参加爱筵,并非表达他们的爱心,而是为了满足自己的口腹。」77

第二个例子:像「没有雨」的云。假师傅将注意力集中在自己身上,并且答允带来更新,但那只是一场表演,是没有实质的空言(参箴二十五14)。在巴勒斯坦,夏天的云常常使湿度增高,令酷热更难抵受。

「他们(叛教者)在讲座公开演说和讲道,他们懂得怎样使经文听起来很属灵,而其义与神的旨意完全不同。」78

「跟随这样的人,会被诱离真道和纯正操守而误入歧途。」79

第三个例子:农夫经常将不结果子的树拔出来。这比喻假师傅没有结出属灵的果子、也没有能力结出属灵的果子,他们是死而又死(参诗五十二5;箴二22;耶一10;约十五1-6)。从另一个角度来看,死而又死可以指他们是透彻地死去。80 第三个观点是他们不单在外表上、 而实际上他们也是没有生命的。81 第四个观点是他们现在死在罪中,而终局是永死。82

旧约使用「连根拔起」的树表示神的审判(参诗五十二5;箴二22;耶一 10)。翻译作「秋」的希腊文是指深秋。犹大使用这个字表达他相信他和他的读者处于末世,距离主再来的日子不远。这是新约作者十分普遍的观点(参罗十三11;彼前四7;提前四1;约壹二18)。在深秋,树叶尽落,枝头的果实也少。83

「这些人并没有重生的确据。」84

假师傅(1)像「礁石」具破坏性;(2)像使人不悦的「云」;(3)像不结果子的「树」。

第13节               第四个例子:「海浪」的「泡沫」将秽物、碎片和废料(残骸,垃圾)冲到岸上。假师傅所到之处,他们散播不道德(「自己可耻的」)和混杂的思想(参赛五十七20),同样显而易见。这比喻强调「... 这些人躁动和不羁的本性。」85

第五个例子:天空中有一些「星」,它们的移动有别于其它的星体。我们现在把这些「流星」和其他星分野。同样地,假师傅的行为与那些明亮的星并不和谐。翻译作星的那一个希腊文(planetes),直译是流荡。很久以前观星家已观察到它们划过天际,它们的移动有别于恒星∕行星,我们现在将这些星体识别出来。同样地假教师的行为如流星,他们偏离轨道,引人走入歧途。

一个关于「流荡的星」不太有说服力的诠释指流星在天际闪过,但迅间便在黑暗中消逝。86 「黑暗」远离光源,表示在信徒群体中的不信者所受的永远惩罚( 「永远存留」)。

(4)假师傅如「海浪」亵渎,也(5)如「流荡的星」不可靠,引人入歧途。

3. 错谬的后果 14-16节

第14-15节               犹大引用次经以诺壹书,这是圣经中唯一的一次称以诺是一位先知;也是唯一在洪水前时期被认定的先知。虽然以诺壹书并非神所默示写成,但祂却引领犹大引用该书。87 圣灵也曾经带领保罗引用异教哲学家的话(参徒十七28)。这是末日审判的预言(参马太福音二十四30;帖后一7-10),这是关於主再来最早的预言。主再来时,如果假师傅当中的不信者还活着,他们将是审判的对象。

犹大引用「亚当的七世孙以诺」似乎是支持创世记第五章的家谱已将每代都列了出来(即一个没有间断的家谱)。不过亦有评论指犹大并没有特别含意,只是按照圣经的记载写这书,他们相信摩西并没有将每一代都记录下来,代与代之间还有没提及的后代。纵使圣经的其他家谱出现跳代记录,然而,仔细阅读创世记第五章的家谱,摩西没有省略了几代的余地。另一个解释如下:

「... 解决这问题的方案是:这被称为预言的,实际上只是引用了以诺壹书的多个篇章;犹大极可能从以诺壹书六十8援引『 亚当的七世孙以诺 』而不是引用创世记第五章的家谱,犹大的引句完全出于以诺壹书。虽然以诺壹书的预言并非典范,但这预言却能在圣经中找到好些平衡的记载和支持,例如:马太福音二十五31-46。」88

「拥有某种敬虔外貌的人,也会出现不虔诚的行为。若出于一颗不敬虔、不悔改的心,那便是不敬虔的行为了。89

「在伊甸园的撒旦和在客西马尼的犹大,他们都用温婉的说话来掩饰他们的不敬虔行为。」90

第16节               正如刚才所引述以诺所说关于「不敬虔」的人的「言」「行」,犹大在这一节作进一步评论,假师傅爱发牢骚,在犹大时期的假师傅抱怨神。

「那些和神断绝了的人,他们倾向抱怨所有的事情。」91

他们追求感观刺激和利益(参4,8,10-11节 )。他们声称有神的真理而持高傲态度,但他们却遗背使徒所传的(参但十一36)。他们并且谄媚人以谋取私利。(参雅二1-13)。

「敬畏神的人并不惧怕人,而无视神的人却以人来取代神的位置。这是追随者行善或作恶的主要根源。」92

IV 劝勉信徒坚守信仰17-23节

犹大向他的读者讲论假师傅的败坏后,他正面地劝勉读者尽管他们面对危险,也要持守信仰。

「强烈谴责叛教者后,犹大在这几节给信徒充满慈爱的教导,劝勉信徒在叛逆纷扰的处境中,忠于所信的。」93

甲. 提醒信徒要记念使徒的警告17-19节

第17-18节「忘记圣经里神的教导和警告,是灵性败坏的主因。

「请记着:这是犹大的第一个命令。在总结部份,它和随后的命令组成一组。」94

这一节的「使徒」,明显是指十二使徒加上保罗,而不是耶稣差派传扬福音的信徒群体(参太二十八19-20)。虽然新约的作者也有将后者称为「使徒」(参罗十六7; 林后八23),不过在这里,「使徒」是指较少的那群体,他们建立教会,将信仰「一次交付圣徒」(参第3节),犹大劝勉信徒要持守这信仰。按功能而言,也是指使徒(按字义是被差派者)。

犹大(第18节)引用使徒的话作为结语,而不是以使徒的话作参考。它与彼得后书三3模式相同,也该是结语。难以断定犹大是不是引用彼后三3,但许多保守的学者认为彼得后书的成书日期在犹大书之后。95

「末世」指教会时代和苦难历史时期的终结。在「末世」之后,神会直接统治人类,首先是千禧年,接着是新天新地的降临(参提前四1;提后三1等)。这和耶稣基督再来统治世界相关。

至于「好讥诮的人」的讥诮对象,似乎神早已启示了祂的旨意(参诗三十五 16; 箴十四 6; 十九 25 等)。

「这些人... 不停尝试以新的不敬虔形式去取得快感。」96

第19节               假师傅的教导使信徒分裂成两大类别:坚守使徒的教导和离开信仰的人。虽然假师傅宣称自己才是那真正属灵的,但实际上是属世的,他们所传的也是不信者的观点。不信的人,没有圣灵内住心里;而那些变节者,也「没有」让「圣灵」改变生命。

「那拒绝圣灵的,他们 沦落、与动物无异,他们不单本身是不道德的,还将混乱带进教会。」97

乙. 给信徒正面的劝勉20-23节

第2 节              犹大在这节中使用「却要」作对比;要将他的读者和假师傅作区分。因我们是圣灵的殿,被敌人恶意攻击,我们需要在灵性上「建立自己」,使自己信心「坚强」。(参林前三9-17,弗二20,彼后三18)

「信徒面对这些问题的最佳方法,是增强他们的属灵免疫力。」98

以下是犹大给信徒的命令。第一个是基本命令,而在第20节下和第21节,他阐述如何做到这一点。

「『造就』(epoikodomountes)」原文是一个复合动词,用来描绘一座建筑物在根基上建造起来;在这里比喻成长像把一座建筑物竖立起来;作者使用现在式来表达,指建立一个强壮和稳定的基督徒品格是一个持续的过程。」99

「我深信神赐给我们 66 卷书,祂并非叫我们只读自己喜欢的篇章如约翰福音第三章或第十四章,而是把 66 卷全部阅读。」100

「... 人们可以在短短几个小时,将多年的建设毁于一旦。不过一个建设者,比一个毁灭者更有成就感。」101

「至圣的真道」是那「一次交付信徒的真道」(第3节);这是基督徒信仰的根基。

第二:真正的信徒不会没有圣灵(第19节)。我们有圣灵,并且在圣灵里祷告。我们祈求神的帮助,使我们的祷告和圣灵的旨意和谐。(弗六18,罗八26-27,林前十二3,加书四6)。换句话说,「在祂的影响下」祷告。102 神是我们最大的帮助,透过祷告,我们稳妥地得到神的帮助。

「灵性的成长和我们随时随地祷告息息相关。」103

第21节               第三:我们要「保持」自己在「神的爱」里(第1,6,13节;参约十五9;罗五5;罗八39)。假如我们离开了神的旨意和神的道,我们便在自己和神之间筑起壁垒,阻碍神的爱倾注到我们里。我们要「恒常」在「基督的爱」里(约十五9-10;约壹二28)。

「信徒其中一个最大的保障是意识到神的爱。」104

第四:我们要牢记「永生」的应许,并盼望这应许的实现(约壹三2;罗八 29),这体现了主耶稣基督给信徒最大的「恩慈」。

「... 欢欣是神赐恩的明证。」105

换句话说,犹大告诫他的读者:只须稍后片时,持守信仰、不要忘记我们的盼望。

「信徒的生命有三个方向:向内是品格的建立(第20节)、向上是与神相交(第20-21节)、向前是期待终极的荣耀成就(第21节)。」106

「这是一幅包含基督徒『信、望、爱』的图画。(林前十三13),『在圣灵里祷告』使这幅图画更丰富。而这里也细心刻画出圣灵,圣父,耶稣基督是三位一体的神。」107

第22节               第五:犹大劝勉他的读者要温柔地帮助(「怜悯」)那些为信仰而挣扎和被假师傅绊倒的信徒。犹大所指的是那些真心寻道,但无法分辨真理和谬误的人,他们对所信的产生动摇。108 我们不应放弃这些弟兄姊妹,我们应该怜悯他们,帮助他们归回正道。

第23节               第六:对于那些已经受到神管教的信徒,神任由他们降服假师傅。犹大要求信徒在神的责罚降临前,将他们从错误中救出来(参摩四11;亚三2)。圣经中,「火」表征神的审判。在这里,犹大看到神的审判临到那些犯罪的、随从假师傅的信徒。109 犹大也看到审判临到不信的人。110

至于那些完全被异端俘虏的人,我们应同情他们,而不是无情地谴责他们。不过我们要心存「惧怕」,不是惧怕和他们接触而受感染,而是惧怕因为认同他们的谬误,使神不悦和受管教。我们应尽量避免和这些人有任何接触,以免沾染了他们腐败的言论和行动(参林前五9-11;帖后三14-15)。「衣服」比喻那沾染了属肉体的行为,例如:个人的习惯和处事方式、言语和择友等。圣经经常使用「衣服」来比喻那些别人能看见的外在行为。

「犹大对假师傅的批评明显是严厉的,但他并没有命令我们和这些麻烦制造者对质(只是避免接触),也没有命令我们为管教他们而作出计划。他只表明这些人会受神的审判。」111

巴斯德有一个很好的指引:

「尽管我们因叛教者的错谬而争辩,我们要爱他们;纵使我们反对他们的工作,谴责他们所使用的方式,我们要爱他们。必须将他们的人与他们的错谬分开处理,虽然很困难,但基督的爱在我们心里,祂给我们智慧的言语。」112

V. 结语24-25节

犹大用一首赞美诗来结束他这一封很短的信。当中包括了为收信人祷告。他希望收信人清楚知道神能保守他们,纵使在叛教者的威胁下,仍然能够持守信仰。

「结束这封信的赞美诗(第24-25节),是举世公认在圣经中最完美的一首。它的重点是信徒在叛教者的威胁下仍然信心坚固,也为这书带来一个美妙的结束。」113

「它把作者从那使他烦扰的属世冲突中抽身,到了永恒的、充满权能和荣耀的神的宝座前。」114

第24节               我们的信心在于神的大能,祂「保守」我们的安全和信心(「... 叫你们无瑕无疵、欢欢喜喜站住他荣耀之前...」)。「祂能拯救到底(希七25)、祂能坚固信心(参罗十六25)、祂能搭救(希二18)、祂征服万物(腓三21)–  祂有能力保守。」115

那翻译作「失脚」的希腊文含绊倒的意思,不单失去平衡,还跌下。「无瑕无疵」(希腊文amomos) 并不意味没有犯罪;这个字的意思是没有充份理由被控诉(参西一22;彼后三14;启十四5)。当义人犯了罪,他认罪悔改,离弃他所犯的罪。这是一幅站在耶稣基督审判桌前的图画。116 不论按教义或道德而言, 这节并非神无条件应许保守所有信徒都不失脚(参第21节)。117

第25节               犹大在这里遥遥呼应假师傅扭曲神和耶稣基督的真理(第4节)。「荣耀」是神所发的光辉;「威严」表达祂的至高无上;「能力」表达神的绝对能力;「权柄」表达神是自主的神。这些都是神永恒(「从万古以前,并现今,直到永永远远」)的属性。神是那永不变改的神,我们亦应忠心到底。

「犹大如此清晰地表达了他对基督的永恒和在万有以先便存在的信念,实在无出其右。」118

「犹大...,一名心被烦扰的牧者,他急切要唤醒他的群体,觉醒在他们中间的威胁。犹大所用尖锐的言词,是古代地中海宗教界常见的修辞手法,不过这不能完全解释犹大如此热切的因由。对于犹大和初期教会大部份信徒来说,信耶稣是一件关乎生与死的事情。任何人或任何事威胁信仰生活,诚然是致死的敌人。」119

一位真正的基督徒会否认他曾认信赐他永生神的儿子耶稣基督吗? 这样的事情在今天的教会里经常发生,有些基督徒改信不认基督的信仰,如伊斯兰教、世上其它主要宗教或异端。有些年青信徒被他们所尊敬的教授说服,认为他们曾信的并不真确。

有人会说:没有真基督徒会否认他们对神的儿子耶稣的信;那否认的,从始至终未曾真正相信,这等人可能从未成为真正的基督徒,最多只是唇徒。可是,经文并未否定真基督徒可能被假师傅蛊惑,而改变他们对基督耶稣的认信。因此,否认信心的真基督徒不会失去救恩,人因信基督而得救,神宣告那人为义,赐圣灵印记,并应许他们和祂的爱永不分离(参约十28;罗八31-39 等)。这是蒙耶稣基督保守(第1节),已重生(约三1-21)的,永不能「未重生」。我们得救非因自己的善行,同样地,不会因我们所做的错事而失落救恩,尽管这不是神为祂的儿女所定下的旨意。

犹大可以明确地指这信是写给那群未得救的变节者,可是他没有这样做。他写信给基督徒,警告所有人,包括基督徒和非基督徒。因此,这书信十分重要。

Bibliography

Alford, Henry. The Greek Testament. 4 vols. London: Rivingtons, 1859-1861.

Allman, James E. “Suffering in the Non-Pauline Epistles.” In Why, O God? Suffering and Disability in the Bible and the Church, pp. 195-205. Edited by Larry J. Waters and Roy B. Zuck. Wheaton: Crossway, 2011.

Bailey, Mark L., and Thomas L. Constable. The New Testament Explorer. Nashville: Word Publishing Co., 1999. Reissued as Nelsons New Testament Survey. Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1999.

Barclay, William. The Letters of John and Jude. The Daily Study Bible series. 2nd ed. Edinburgh: Saint Andrew Press, 1962.

Bateman, Herbert W., IV. “Rebellion and God’s Judgment in the Book of Jude.” Bibliotheca Sacra 170:680 (October-December 2013):453-77.

Bauckham, Richard J. Jude, 2 Peter. Word Biblical Commentary series. Waco: Word Books, 1983.

Baxter, J. Sidlow. Explore the Book. 6 vols. in 1. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960.

Bigg, Charles. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude. International Critical Commentary series. 2nd ed. and reprint ed. Edinburgh: T. and T. Clark, 1961.

Blum, Edwin A. “Jude.” In Hebrews-Revelation. Vol. 12 of The Expositors Bible Commentary. 12 vols. Edited by Frank E. Gaebelein. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1981.

Calvin, John. Institutes of the Christian Religion. The Library of Christian Classics series, volumes 20 and 21. Edited by John T. McNeill. Translated by Ford Lewis Battles. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1960.

Carson, Donald A., and Douglas J. Moo. An Introduction to the New Testament. 2nd ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005.

Cedar, Paul A. James, 1, 2 Peter, Jude. The Communicator’s Commentary series. Waco: Word Books, 1984.

Coder, S. Maxwell. Jude: The Acts of the Apostates. Chicago: Moody Press, 1958.

Darby, John Nelson. Synopsis of the Books of the Bible. 5 vols. Revised ed. New York: Loizeaux Brothers Publishers, 1942.

DeGraaf, David. “Some Doubts about Doubt: The New Testament Use of Diakrino.” Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 48:8 (December 2005):733-55.

Desjardins, Michel. “The Portrayal of the Dissidents in 2 Peter and Jude: Does It Tell Us More About the ‘Godly’ Than the ‘Ungodly’?” Journal for the Study of the New Testament 30 (June 1987):89-102.

Fanning, Buist M. “A Theology of Peter and Jude” In A Biblical Theology of the New Testament, pp. 437-71. Edited by Roy B. Zuck. Chicago: Moody Press, 1994.

Gaebelein, Arno C. The Annotated Bible. 4 vols. Reprint ed. Chicago: Moody Press, and New York: Loizeaux Brothers, Inc., 1970.

A Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament. By C. G. Wilke. Revised by C. L. Wilibald Grimm. Translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer, 1889.

Green, Michael. The Second Epistle General of Peter and the General Epistle of Jude. Tyndale New Testament Commentaries series. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1975.

Guthrie, Donald. New Testament Introduction. 3 vol. 2nd ed. London: Tyndale Press, 1966.

Henry, Matthew. Commentary on the Whole Bible. One volume ed. Edited by Leslie F. Church. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing Co., 1961.

Hiebert, D. Edmond. “An Exposition of Jude 3-4.” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:566 (April- June 1985):142-51.

_____. “An Exposition of Jude 12-16.” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:567 (July-September 1985):238-49.

_____. “An Exposition of Jude 17-23.” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:568 (October-December 1985):355-66.

_____. Second Peter and Jude: An Expositional Commentary. Greenville, S.C.: Unusual Publications, 1989.

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia. Edited by James Orr. 1939 ed. 5 vols. S.v. “Jude, The Epistle of,” by William G. Moorehead. 3:1767-71.

Jamieson, Robert; A. R. Fausset; and David Brown. Commentary Practical and Explanatory on the Whole Bible. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1961.

Johnston, Jason. “The Multichiastic Structure of Jude and Its Contribution to the Purpose of the Epistle.” Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 2008.

Kelly, J. N. D. A Commentary on the Epistles of Peter and Jude. Thornapple Commentaries series. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1981.

Lange, John Peter, ed. Commentary on the Holy Scripture. 12 vols. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960. Vol. 12: James—Revelation, by J. P.

Lange, J. J. Van Oosterzee, G. T. C. Fronmüller, and Karl Braune. Enlarged and edited by E. R. Craven. Translated by J. Isidor Mombert and Evelina Moore.

Lawlor, George Lawrence. Translation and Exposition of the Epistle of Jude. Nutley, N.J.: Presbyterian and Reformed Publishing Co., 1972.

Lenski, Richard C. H. The Interpretation of the Epistles of St. Peter, St. John and St. Jude. Reprint ed. Minneapolis: Angsburg Publishing House, 1961.

Litfin, A. Duane. “A Biblical Strategy for Confronting the Cults.” Bibliotheca Sacra 135:539 (July-September 1978):232-40.

MacDonald, William. II Peter and Jude: The Christian and Apostasy. Wheaton: Harold Shaw Publishers, 1972.

Mayor, J. B. “The General Epistle of Jude.” In The Expositors Greek Testament 5 (1910):207-78. 5 vols. 4th ed. Edited by W. Robertson Nicoll. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1900-1912.

McGee, J. Vernon. Thru the Bible with J. Vernon McGee. 5 vols. Pasadena, Calif.: Thru The Bible Radio; and Nashville: Thomas Nelson, Inc., 1983.

McNeile, A. H. An Introduction to the Study of the New Testament. 2nd ed. Revised by C. S. C. Williams. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965.

Morgan, G. Campbell. An Exposition of the Whole Bible. Westwood, N.J.: Fleming H. Revell, 1959.

_____. Living Messages of the Books of the Bible. 2 vols. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1912.

_____. The Unfolding Message of the Bible. Westwood, N.J.: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1961.

The Nelson Study Bible. Edited by Earl D. Radmacher. Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1997.

Pentecost, Edward C. “Jude.” In The Bible Knowledge Commentary: New Testament, pp. 917-24. Edited by John F. Walvoord and Roy B. Zuck. Wheaton: Scripture Press Publications, Victor Books, 1983.

Plummer, Alfred. “The General Epistles of St. James and St. Jude.” In An Exposition of the Bible. 6 vols. Hartford, Conn.: S. S. Scranton Co., 1903.

Reicke, Bo. The Epistles of James, Peter, and Jude. Anchor Bible series. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., 1964.

Robertson, Archibald Thomas. Word Pictures in the New Testament. 6 vols. Nashville: Broadman Press, 1931.

Salmond, S. D. F. “Jude.” In The Pulpit Commentary. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., n.d.

Savelle, Charles H. “Canonical and Extracanonical Portraits of Balaam.” Bibliotheca Sacra 166:664 (October-December 2009):387-404.

Senior, Donald. “The Letters of Jude and Second Peter.” The Bible Today 25:4 (July 1987):209-14.

Sidebottom, E. M. James, Jude, 2 Peter. New Century Bible Commentary series. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., and London: Marshall, Morgan & Scott, 1982.

Thiessen, Henry Clarence. Introduction to the New Testament. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1962.

Thompson, R. Duane. “Jude.” In The Wesleyan Bible Commentary. 6 vols. Edited by Charles W. Carter. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1964-1969.

The Twentieth Century New Testament: A Translation into Modern English. Chicago: Moody Press, n.d.

Wallace, David H. “Jude.” In The Wycliffe Bible Commentary, pp. 1487-90. Edited by Charles F. Pfeiffer and Everett F. Harrison. Chicago: Moody Press, 1962.

Walvoord, John F. Daniel: The Key to Prophetic Revelation. Chicago: Moody Press, 1971.

Wand, J. W. C. The General Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude. Westminster Commentaries series. London: Methuen & Co., 1934.

Ward, Ronald A. The Epistles of John and Jude: A Study Manual. Shield Bible Study series. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1965.

Wiersbe, Warren W. The Bible Exposition Commentary. 2 vols. Wheaton: Scripture Press Publications, Victor Books, 1989.

Wilkin, Robert N. “He Is Able to Keep You From Stumbling! Jude 24.” Grace Evangelical Society News 9:1 (January-February 1994):2-3.

Williams, Nathaniel Marshman. “Commentary on the Epistle of Jude.” In An American Commentary on the New Testament. 1888. Reprint ed. Philadelphia: American Baptist Publication Society, n.d.

Witmer, John A. “The Truth about Error.” Bibliotheca Sacra 124:495 (July-September 1967):248-53.

Wolff, Richard. A Commentary on the Epistle of Jude. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960.

Woods, Guy N. A Commentary on the New Testament Epistles of Peter, John, and Jude. Nashville: Gospel Advocate Co., 1954.


1 See Donald A. Carson and Douglas J. Moo, An Introduction to the New Testament, pp. 690-92.

2 See J.B. Mayor, “the General Epistle of Jude”, in The Expositor’s Greek Testament, 5:226-29.

3 Richard L. Bauckham, Jude, 2 Peter, p. 3.

4 Ibid., p. 16.

5 For discussion of the relationship of 2 Peter and Jude, see D. Edmond Hiebert, Second Peter and Jude, pp. 196-200; and Charles Bigg, A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude, pp. 216-24.

6 See Donald Guthrie, New Testament Introduction, 3:229-33.

7 Hiebert, p. 185. See pp. 185-92 for evidence of Jude’s authenticity.

8 E.G., Bauckham, p.3. See Bigg, pp. 305-10, for references to Jude in the writings of the early church.

9 See Jason Johnston, “The Multichiastic Structure of Jude and its Contribution to the Purpose of the Epistle” (Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 2008).

10 Edward C. Pentecost, “Jude,” in The Bible Knowledge Commentary: New Testament, p. 918.

11 The Nelson Study Bible, p. 2156

12 Michael Green, The Second Epistle General of Peter and the General Epistle of Jude, p. 39. Cf. A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6:184.

13 G Campbell Morgan, An Exposition of the Whole Bible, p. 532.

14 See Herbert W. bateman IV, “Rebellion and Gods Judgment in the Book of Jude”, Bibliotheca Sacra 170:680 (October-December 2013):453-77.

15 Adapted from G. Campbell Morgan, Living Messages of the Books of the Bible, 2:2:195-208.

16 S. Maxwell Coder, Jude: The Acts of the Apostates, p. 7.

17 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 192.

18 Paul A. Cedar, James, 1, 2 Peter, Jude, p. 244.

19 Pentecost, p. 919.

20 R. Duane Thompson, “Jude,” in The Wesleyan Bible Commentary, 6:389.

21 J. W. C. Wand, The General Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude, p. 196.

22 Matthew Henry, Commentary on the Whole Bible, p.1967.

23 D. Edmond Hiebert, “An Exposition of Jude 3-4,” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:566 (April-June 1985):144.

24 G. F. C. Fronmüller, “The Epistle General of Jude,” in Langes Commentary on the Holy Scriptures,12:5:13.

25 Guy N. Woods, A Commentary on the New Testament Epistles of Peter, John, and Jude, p. 385.

26 Cedar, p. 250.

27 G. Campbell Morgan, Living Messages of the Books of the Bible, 2:2:203.

28 Nathaniel M. Williams, “Commentary on the Epistle of Jude,” in An American Commentary on the New Testament, 7:8.

29 J. Vernon McGee, “The General Epistle of Jude”, in An American Commentary on the New Testament, 7:8

30 William Barclay, The Letters of John and Jude, p. 211.

31 E. M. Sidebottom, James, Jude, 2 Peter, p. 83. Cf. Pentecost, p. 920.

32 Buist M. Fanning, “A Theology of Peter and Jude,” in A Biblical Theology of the New Testament, p. 468.

33 J.N. Darby, Synopsis of the Books of the Bible, 5:555.

34 Bauckham, p. 11.

35 McGee, 5:852.

36 Mayor, 5:256

37 Green, p. 162.

38 E.g., Michael Desjardins, “The Portrayal of the Dissidents in 2 Peter and Jude: Does It Tell Us More About the ‘Godly’ Than the ‘Ungodly’?” Journal for the Study of the New Testament 30 (June 1987):93-95.

39 See J. N. D. Kelly, A Commentary on the Epistles of Peter and Jude, p. 252; J. B. Mayor, “The General Epistle of Jude,” in The Expositors Greek Testament, 5:257; and Henry Alford, The Greek Testament, 4:531.

40 E.g., Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 226; George Lawrence Lawlor, Translation and Exposition of the Epistle of Jude, p. 60, footnote 57; and Bigg, p. 327.

41 Bauckham, p. 41.

42 McGee, 5:854

43 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 185.

44 Arno C. Gaebelein, The Annotated Bible, 4:179.

45 Henry, p. 1968.

46 Green, p. 164.

47 E.g., Edwin Blum, “Jude,” in Hebrews-Revelation, vol. 12 of The Expositors Bible Commentary, p. 389.

48 Sidebottom, p. 85.

49 See Warren W. Wiersbe, The Bible Exposition Commentary, 2:551-52, for refutation of this view.

50 John Calvin, Institutes of the Christian Religion, 1:14:15.

51 E.g., International Standard Bible Encyclopaedia, s.v. “Jude, the Epistle of,” by William G. Moorehead, 3:1771).

52 E.g., Lenski, pp. 610-12, 650-52.

53 Mayor, 5:260.

54 Ronald A. Ward, The Epistles of John and Jude: A Study Manual, p. 81.

55 See James E. Allman, “Suffering in the Non-Pauline Epistles”, in Why, O God?  Suffering and Disability in the Bible and Church, p. 205.

56 Alfred Plummer, “The General Epistles of St. James and St. Jude,” in An Exposition of the Bible, 6:655.

57 Arno C. Gaebelein, The Annotated Bible, 4:179-80. See also Richard Lenski, The Interpretation of the Epistles of St. Peter, St. John and St. Jude, p. 616; Morgan, 2:2:198.

58 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 241.

59 Ibid., p. 243.

60 McGee, 5:860.

61 John F. Walvoord, Daniel: The Key to Prophetic Revelation, p. 246.

62 Plummer, 6:656.

63 Bauckham, p. 61.

64 Lenski, p. 641. See Bauckham, pp. 65-76, for an extended excursus on the background and source of verse 9.

65 Richard Wolff, A Commentary on the Epistle of Jude, pp. 91-92. Cf. vv. 8, 10, 11, 15, 16.

66 Barclay, p. 222.

67 Green, p. 171.

68 Williams, 7:14.

69 Coder, p. 72.

70 Alford, 4:536

71 Barclay, p. 225.

72 Blum, p. 392. Cf. Charles H. Savelle, “Canonical and Extracanonical Portraits of Balaam,” Bibliotheca Sacra 166:664 (October-December 2009):387-404.

73 McGee, 5:863.

74 Barclay, p. 192.

75 Lawlor, p. 83. Italics added for clarification.

76 Wiersbe, 2:555. Italics his.

77 D. Edmond Hiebert, “An Exposition of Jude 12-16,” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:567 (July-September 1985):240-41.

78 McGee,5:864

79 Hiebert, p. 242.

80 The Twentieth Century New Testament.

81 Alford, 4:537.

82 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 261.

83 Kelly, p. 272.

84 Williams, 7:16.

85 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 12-16,” p. 243.

86 See Kelly, p. 274, for a refutation of this view.

87 Cf. Fanning, p. 465; Bauckham, p. 96.

88 David H. Wallace, “Jude,” in The Wycliffe Bible Commentary, p. 1489.

89 Wolff, p. 113.

90 Williams, 7:18.

91 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 12-16,” p. 247.

92 Mayor, 5:272.

93 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 273.

94 Green, p. 180.

95 See my discussion of this subject in my notes on 2 Peter.

96 D. Edmond Hiebert, “An Exposition of Jude 17-23,” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:568 (October-December 1985):358.

97 S. D. F. Salmond, “Jude,” in The Pulpit Commentary, p. 14.

98 A. Duane Litfin, “A Biblical Strategy for Confronting the Cults,” Bibliotheca Sacra 135:539 (July- September 1978):235. Cf. 1 Pet. 1:5-7.

99 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 17-23,” p. 360. Cf. Phil. 2:12.

100 McGee, 5:871.

101 Cedar, p. 258.

102 Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown, p.1521.

103 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 17-23,” p. 361.

104 Plummer, 6:662.

105 Pentecost, p. 923.

106 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 17-23,” p. 362.

107 Idem, Second Peter . . ., p. 286.

108 David DeGraaf, “Some Doubts about Doubt: The New Testament Use of Diakrino,” Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 48:8 (December 2005):742-43.

109 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 290; Lawlor, p. 127. Cf. John 15:6; 1 Cor. 3:15.

110 Coder, p. 116. Cf. Rev. 20:15.

111 The Neslon…, p.2156.

112 J. Sidlow Baxter, Explore the Book, 6:316.

113 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 204.

114 Bo Reicke, The Epistles of James, Peter, and Jude, p. 217.

115 William MacDonald, II Peter and Jude: The Christian and Apostasy, p. 92.

116 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 295.

117 See Robert N. Wilkin, “He Is Able to Keep You From Stumbling! Jude 24,” Grace Evangelical Society News 9:1 (January-February 1994):2-3.

118 Bigg, p. 344.

119 Donald Senior, “The Letters of Jude and Second Peter,” The Bible Today 25:4 (July 1987):211.

猶大書註釋

Related Media

托馬斯康斯塔布爾博士

2017 版

歷史背景

傳統上,學者都認為耶穌的同母異父的弟弟猶大(太十三55, 可六3)是這書信的作者。他也是第一世紀耶路撒冷教會領袖雅各的弟弟(猶1,徒十五13)。雖然近年來也有學者質疑這說法,但他們卻不能證實這是錯誤的。1 按此而言,猶大(希臘文是 Judas, 希伯來文是 Judah,意即讚美)是一名猶太的基督徒,他和雅各同樣是一名希臘化的加利利猶太人,用高雅的希臘文寫成這書信。故此我們可以預期,猶大引用希伯來經文而非如其他新約作者引用七十士譯本。

耶穌按肉身的兄弟,在耶穌在世傳道的日子並不信祂(約七5)。我們也可以假設猶大也和雅各一樣,在耶穌復活後才信的(林前十五7)2。耶穌的兄弟和其他人在耶路撒冷聚集在一起,一起禱告等待聖靈的降臨(徒一14)。耶路撒冷教會的人都熟悉他們(林前九5)。

因猶大經常引用舊約經文,我們相信這封信是寫給一群熟悉舊約聖經的猶太人。這書書信的內容對所有基督徒都是真確的,對猶太基督徒尤甚。因此,很多學者都相信這書信原本的收信人是一群猶太的基督徒。

「…從信的內容來看,這不是一封給所有基督徒的大公書信,該以當地一群特定的信徒作為寫作對象…」3

「關於誰是猶大書的收信人,按我們能夠收集到的少許資料,相信生活在外邦的猶太基督徒群體是主要的收信人,但卻不是唯一的收信人。」4

由於猶大是耶穌的弟弟,他可能活到第二世紀,這封書信的寫作日期很難斷定。公元66-70年猶太人叛亂之後,猶大若仍然生存,他可能在耶路撒冷或巴勒斯坦地以外生活。按書中有關假師傅和使徒的經文來看(第3-5節和17節),這可能是五旬節聖靈降臨數年後的教會情況。猶大書和彼得書信都有很多近似的地方,因此估計猶大書和彼得書信是同期的作品,5 但這是沒有確據的估計而已。比較可信是猶大在公元67-80年期間寫成猶大書,那時他或許居住在巴勒斯坦以外的地方。6

雖然我們無法確定猶大書的寫作日期和歷史背景,但卻沒有影響這書的信息或價值。

「猶大書比彼得後書有更屬實的明證。」7

寫作特色

很多學者都認為猶大書其實是一篇「書信形式的講章」。8 假如猶大是站在他的讀者面前傳遞這信息,這必然是一篇講章。因他不能面對面給他的讀者宣講他的信息,所以他把信息以書信形式寫出來。新約中使用書信形式的講章還有雅各書、希伯來書和約翰壹書。

結構

好些研讀猶大書的學生留意到,猶大書的基本寫作結構是交錯結構(chiastic structure,或稱扇形結構);他們可能找到不同的交錯結構。9

寫作目的

「貫穿這卷書的信息:提防叛教者。」10

「新約中只有少數書卷比猶大書對我們這世代有更多要說的話。」11

這封書信似是針對早期的諾斯底主義。

「在這裡有多個發展為後期諾斯底主義的元素:崇尚知識作為從道德倫理中解放的藉口;高傲地對待『落後無知』的教會領袖;對天使學感興趣、分黨、縱慾。」12

大綱

I. 引言 1-2 節

II. 寫信目的 3-4 節

III. 防避假師傅的警告 5-16 節

甲. 過去的錯謬 5-7 節

1. 以色列人的例子 第5節

2. 天使的例子 第6節

3. 異教徒的例子 第7節

乙. 現在的錯謬 8-16 節

1. 錯謬的本質 8-9節

2. 錯謬的嚴重性 10-13節

3. 錯謬的後果 14-16節

IV. 勸勉信徒堅守信仰 17-23 節

甲. 提醒信徒要記念使徒的警告 17-19節

乙. 給信徒正面的勸勉 20-23節

V. 結語 24-25 節

信息

猶大書的教導:我們必須忠於我們的信仰。這是從正面來說,可是,猶大所強調的,大部份是負面的,他警告離開從前一次交付聖徒的真道的危險(第3節)。猶大書的主題是叛教 – 離開真道。叛教並非論述救恩,而是順服。基督徒離開信仰,可以和非基督徒般容易。有些年青的基督徒在專上學院或大學時期離開信仰後,可能永不回轉。

「叛教」這詞在基督教圈子時有所聞,意即離開信仰,並非指在某時刻的失腳(例如彼得在基督受審期間不認主)。叛教包含否認信仰的主要教義;「倒退」一般指道德或靈性熱忱下滑,或許包含離開聖經的主要教導;「屬肉體」指跟隨感觀肉慾,或許離開信仰。

猶大先為叛教下定義(第4節)。我相信第四節經文含明顯遞進,道出叛教的發展,從不敬虔到縱慾,最終否認信仰。「不敬虔」的人拒絕神的權威在他之上,他可以是信徒或非信徒,欠缺對神的崇敬,包括自決(按個人深思熟慮的意願而行)。坎伯·摩根把叛教定義為「蓄意不敬虔」。13

下決定後,變節者以不敬虔作行為基礎,出現離開神的表徵。他縱慾,行為經常出現不羈,過度追求肉體的滿足而不羞愧。叛逆從自決發展到道德領域。

接著,他用理性合理化自己的行為,說服自己所行是正確的,使充滿罪疚感的良心禁聲。結果,他找到方法說服自己顛倒是非,致使他否認神的道,認為神錯了,而叛教者的話卻「沒有問題」;神說對的,他說「錯」。他從自決,轉為道德上的偏離,繼而心智上偏離。這三方面都偏離了盡心、盡性、盡力愛神。

叛教者的出現意味教會出現了異端,其根源是個人生命中有某些範疇拒絕交給神。很多人都留意到叛教者從道德上的失腳,演變為不遵守教義,這是叛教者的特徵。

隨後,猶大說明叛教的本質和後果(第5-11節),他列舉三個組別和三個人物作為例子。

組別#1:猶大使用以色列人在加低斯叛逆神的旨意,說明自決是叛教的根源(第五節),這事件導致叛教者提早死亡。叛逆的那一代不能進應許之地,他們在曠野漂流,最終死在曠野。

組別#2:不守本位的天使,顯示道德上的叛逆(第六節)。他們叛逆的行為,顯示他們打從心底叛逆神,結果是永遠拘禁。

組別#3:所多瑪和蛾摩拉的叛逆性質是拒絕神給當地居民法律(第七節)。這些不敬虔的人以行動說出他們的生活方式是對的,而神是錯的,這是理性上的謬誤。叛逆的結果是面對終極審判。所多瑪人起初瞎了,繼而被殺。

個人#1:猶大使用「該隱」的例子描繪叛逆。該隱蓄意不順服神給他的旨意(節11節),他是一個自以為義的人。

個人#2:猶大使用「巴蘭」的例子描繪叛逆。巴蘭向巴勒建議,引誘以色列人和摩押人行淫(節11節)。巴蘭是一名極其貪婪的人。

個人#3:猶大使用以可拉的例子描繪叛逆。可拉企圖顛倒是非(節11節),並且十分自負。

總括來說:自義、貪心和自負顯示叛教的不同階段:自決、道德和理智。猶大在第12節和第13節還指出了叛教和叛教者的其他特質。猶大不願意我們分辯不出離開真道的狀況。

瞭解叛教者帶來的禍害後,猶大給讀者甚麼勸勉呢?他給予一個一般命令和一些特別誡命。

讓我們先看看那一般命令(第3節)。「竭力為真道爭辯」意即小心翼翼和堅決地作出努力。從接著的特別誡命,我們可學習該怎樣做。

讓我們先看看第20-23節的特別誡命:守這些誡命包括3件事:首先,「造就我們自己」(20節上)。這是恆常服從神而來的靈命成長,應對叛教者的自決問題。第二,「在聖靈裡禱告」(20節下),即求神幫助,應對叛教者的道德問題。

第三,「仰望」未來(21-22節),這需要清楚地聚焦終極的存有。應對叛教者的理智問題。當我們存著盼望,我們會作出正確的抉擇,例如:為將來而非眼前的事物而活。若是這樣,我們常在神的愛中。

對猶大來說,「竭力為真道爭辯」的最佳的表達方法,是個人對神忠信至死不渝,作信實的模範;他腦海中未有護教或基督教證據,當然有為此竭盡全力的人。

應用方面,讓我提出兩個問題並作出回答。

第一:我們要爭辯的「真道」是甚麼?那是「一次交付聖徒的真道」,即神在聖經裡的特別啟示,真道的中心是耶穌基督,是神給教會的大使命(太二十八19-20)。

第二:為「真道」作甚麼爭辯?人必須自願服在神的權柄下,行事為人與祂的旨意和諧,堅信祂的啟示與人的理性並無衝突。這是給每個基督徒的呼召。

縱使現今世代叛教的不少,保持對神信實是可行的。猶大書幫助我們忠於神。既然猶大給信徒寫這封警告信,即基督徒作出叛教行為是可能發生的。14願主對我們每個人說:「做得好,我又良善、又忠心的僕人。」15

註釋

I. 引言 1-2 節

猶大在信的開端首先介紹自己,也祝願讀者在神的祝福裡,預備他們接受這封信的信息。

第1節 「這卷為叛教作定義的書卷,所使用的名字讓我們聯想到世上最惡名昭彰、無出其右的叛徒。」16

這卷書的作者「猶大」,謙卑地表達他的身份。他大可以自稱為耶穌的弟弟,但他卻選擇以他和基督的屬靈關系(如雅一1)自稱作基督的「僕人」(希臘文 doulos),直譯是奴隸的意思。

「作者自稱是雅各的弟兄,這稱呼是獨一的。新約聖經中並沒有其他作者使用家庭關系來介紹自己。」17

「也許猶大並非教會領袖,他的名字不單不曾在使徒行傳中被提及,也沒有在別的新約書卷中出現;因此他以在耶路撒冷教會當領袖的雅各來介紹自己,也是很自然的事。」18

猶大使用了三個不同的身份來稱呼他的讀者,他是最早使用三重身份組合的作者,成了這封書信的特色,也表現出猶大的思想精密完備。他的稱呼包含過去聖靈給聖徒的呼召(第3節)、現在在父神的愛中(「在父神裡蒙愛」,參第21節)和聖子從現在直到永遠的保守(「為耶穌基督保守的人」,參第14,21節)。

「對神的呼召、愛和保守的認識,為身處叛教滋擾的信徒帶來保證和平安。」

「猶大對收信人的每一個稱呼,都遙指信中的內容:被召暗指『同得救恩』(第3節);神的愛則在第21節提及;為基督保守的人則暗示『仰望我們主耶穌基督的憐憫,直到永生。』(第21和24節)。」19

「保守」是這書的鑰字,原文總共出現了五次(第1節,第6節兩次,第13節和第21節,和合本分別譯作保守、守、拘留和存留)。

「雖然猶大堅持人的合作對成全恩典工作很重要,但他沒有一刻忘記從靈性角度來說,我們的救恩是領受得來的!」20

第2節              按我們犯罪的情況,我們需要神的「恩典」。我們被那難以察覺的引誘圍繞著,它給我們不停的刺激,我們極需要神所賜的「平安」;我們需要神的「愛」給我們保守和勉勵去打那屬靈的爭戰。猶大書的讀者十分需要這些幫助去面對假教師的影響,他接著便討論這些影響。

「這些並不是自自然然地擁有的基督徒美德,而是神的禮物。作者祈求這些美德厚厚地賜予收信人。雖然是禮物,神的打造和賜予,轉化成人的品格。」21

II. 寫信目的 3-4 節

猶大解釋他寫信的目的,用以帶出信的內容,讓讀者明白這課題的迫切性。

第3節              很多追隨聖靈引領的牧者,與猶大有「同感」:談論救恩和一些正面的事情是一件樂事;不過也有一些情況迫使我們提出一些警告。這些信息因涉及一些負面的事情而使人不悅,不過神的子民應為這些警告而感恩。

「罪惡促使好的法律規條出現,因此引致危險的錯誤,也給予正確防衛真理的機會。」22

交付聖徒的信仰是神的特殊啟示,已包含在聖經和使徒傳揚的道(加一23,提前四1);猶大的讀者需要努力持守這信仰,猶如爭取冠軍的運動員辛勤練習去戰勝挑戰者(提前六12,提後四7-8,彼後一5)。

「翻譯作『竭力』的希臘文(epagonizesthai)是一個複合不定式的字,這個字在新約聖經中只在這裡出現了一次。這字的動詞形式 (agonizomai) 可解作「疼痛難忍」。這字通常用於摔跤比賽中努力掙扎去克服對手。它也普遍地在衝突,競賽,辯論,或訴訟等情況被使用,指一個人要耗盡一切精力去爭取勝利。」23

這個複合動詞所表達的圖畫,是一個人表明立場來捍衛和保留對手想要搶走的東西。24

「不消說,這些努力掙扎的性質是合乎道德和具說服力的。信徒被禁止使用武力:當彼得企圖拔出刀來去保護耶穌時,耶穌在憂傷中譴責彼得,並叫他收刀入銷;並表明祂的追隨者不可為祂動刀槍。」25

「猶大寫這封信有兩個重點:他希望收信人不會因假師傅的誤導而走上歧途。他禱告祈求他們竭力持守當初交付給他們的真道。」26

「信仰在世上的最後爭辯並不是言語上的爭辯,而是以生命來演繹信仰。」27

「虛假的自由主義和假人道的軟弱,同樣是錯誤的。」28

「在猶大時期,叛教只如手掌大小的一片雲,但今天卻像龍捲風席捲全球。」29

這節使用「一次交付」來強調這信仰的規範性和不可改變的性質。

第4節              這節的「有些人」和第三節的「聖徒」成為對比。這些人是「偷著」進到教會(如彼前二1所描述)。約翰則說很多「反基督的人」「從我們中間出去」(約壹二18-19);猶大卻說「有些人」「偷著進來」。

「翻譯作『偷著進來』的希臘文”pareisedusan”…含有秘密地,悄悄地,巧妙地將一些毒素滲透入某個社群或情況中。」30

「…這不單是一些外來的信條被帶進教會,使教會感到困擾,而是異端入侵教會,將他們的教義帶進來。」 31

「他們能夠偷進來(猶第四節,另參加二4)是因為第一世紀的講道者週遊不同的地方講道(徒十三15,約貳7-11節、十二宗徒訓誨錄11.1-12; 13.1-7),當中也有些是群體中興起的領袖,他們卻將異教的教訓靜悄悄地帶進教會(彼後二1,徒二十29-30,羅十六17-18)。」32

「猶大書發人深省的地方是他繼續爭辯,由於偷偷走進來的使會眾腐敗,並蔓延至終極審判。但他清楚表達他們沒有被捕,但經歷不同的階段直至那日。」33

這些人有如麥子中的稗子(參太十三24-25, 38-39)。

「猶大的敵對者是一群來到教會的宣教師,他們既有號召力、又充滿魅力,但他們其實是反律法主義者。雖然他們自認是耶穌基督的追隨者,但他們卻拒絕所有的道德權威,無論是摩西律法(第8-10節)或基督親自的教導(第4節、第8節)…」

「拒絕道德權威的同時,他們縱慾,特別是與『性』相關的不端行為(第6-8節,第10節)。他們故意蔑視猶太人的道德標準,遵從異教的放任行為。」34

引文的作者使用 “charismatics 這個英文字時,是使用這字的一般含意:充滿魅力和影響力,並不代表這些假師傳相信聖靈的恩賜。

可能神早已知道這些敵對者的罪行、他們「早已」被「定罪」,只等將來才刑罰他們。另一觀點指有別的作者已為叛教發出警告。35 原文 ”Prographo”這字的意思是「預先寫下」。

「定罪」是肯定他們所犯的罪的刑罰在前面等待他們。(太七15,可十三22,徒二十29-30,彼後第2章)

「『不敬虔』(希臘文 asebeis)可說是這書的重點(參第15節和第18節),就如以諾書一般。」36

當日猶大書的收信人能夠透過兩類特別的活動,看到這些不虔誠的人的本性。他們利用摩西律法給予人的自由(神的恩)作為縱慾、放蕩的機會(反律法主義),這正是諾斯底派的罪行。在這節和這書的其他部份,都是受他們影響的明證。37 不過亦有人不同意這推論而有所爭辯。38

其次,他們歪曲聖經啟示的真理,這證明他們否認神和耶穌基督(約壹二22-23,多一16)。按希臘文的文法結構,這節的「主宰」可以指神、也可以指耶穌基督。39 不過,亦有很多學者認為猶大在這裡指基督同時擁有這兩個身份。40

「雖然他們自稱是耶穌基督的追隨者,猶大卻說因他們拒絕基督對道德的要求,他們其實是拒絕基督作他們的主、也否定基督的權柄。」41

「因教會實際上擁護和包庇令人厭惡的不道德行為,這個國家(美國)的危險不斷增加。」42

伴隨著教義的偏差,他們時常為倫理和道德的罪惡辯護。

III. 防避假師傅的警告 5-16 節

「新約中並沒有其他書卷好像這簡短的猶大書,強烈譴責放蕩的人和變節者。」43

甲. 過去的錯謬 5 -7 節

猶大使用了三個過往失敗的例子來警告讀者離開真道的危險。聖潔的神公開審判作惡者並不是嶄新的事情。

「為何這書信不按時序排列事件?事出必有因,我們相信這排列方式是教導我們叛教的起因和結局。」44

1. 以色列人的例子 第5節

在有禮貌的引言後(見彼後一12),猶大提醒讀者他跟著所說的,是不爭的事實。讀者已知這些事例,因為神將一切的事透過聖經「一次交付聖徒」(第3節,參約壹二20-21)。

「講道的設計並非在每篇講章教導我們新的事物,而是『提醒我們』,好使我們把忘記了的事情再次記起。」45

神從埃及地拯救以色列人,使他們從為奴之地得自由,但他們卻不願意繼續相信神的應許、不信祂的大能(參民十四11,申一32)。神給他們的審判是讓那「不信的一代」在曠野倒斃,沒有將變節者帶到應許之地。因為猶大將假師傳和那些被拯救離開埃及,卻在曠野倒斃的以色列人作比較,所以說假師傳中也有一些是基督徒,是合理的結論。他們同樣沒有持守所信的道,他們背棄神、叛逆神,神也會審判他們。

「以曠野的以色列人作暗喻,那些故意違反神的道而走上歧途的假師傅,明顯是正統的基督徒。」46

也有釋經家相信,猶大在這一節指那些從來沒有相信耶和華的以色列人。47

其實,猶大的重點是要指出這些假師傅的行為,而不在於他們是否信徒。不管他們曾否得救,不信的結果總導致一些破壞。神肯定「摧毀」這些不信的人;如他們並未得救,將會永遠被毀滅。

「猶大堅信我們的救主同時也是毀滅者。」48

2. 天使的例子 第6節

有一群「天使」放棄了在神身邊服事的恩寵(「不守本位」),他們離棄神(「離開自己的住處」),招致神的忿怒。有釋經家相信猶大這裡是暗指創世記六1-4的事件(參太二十二30)49。不過也有學者相信猶大指有些天使叛逆神,而最終撒旦被驅逐離開天堂。我個人認為第二個詮釋較為合理。

「有些人抱怨聖經沒有清晰和有系統地提供魔鬼墮落的資料,例如:原因、方式、時間、角色。但這些資料和我們沒有關連,既無須輕輕帶過,不提則更好。若聖靈為滿足我們的好奇心而提供歷史上的空白片段,是無效果的。」50

偽經以諾壹書描述了這場叛亂,因此有學者猜測猶大是引用這書。51 不過也有學者說猶大只是認定了這書的內容。52 不管是那個論點,使用其他典籍作為參巧資料並不是不常有的(參徒十七28等)。雖然猶大引用以諾壹書,但他此舉不應被看為以諾壹書因而自動成為神的啟示。

猶大所說的叛逆「天使」,現正受綑綁(拘留在黑暗裡),等待神的「審判」(參彼後二4),這可能是撒旦黨羽以外的其他墮落天使,因撒旦的黨羽 – 鬼,在現今世上還享有相當自由度。

「雖使用『永遠』來形容拘留,其實只是暫時拘留(這些天使),等待最後審判。」53

猶大這例子說明了他那時代的變節者,他們放棄了服事神和榮耀神的優越地位和祝福,他們不守本位,因此被神嚴懲。與人不同,這些墮落天使未蒙揀選。不論好的或壞的天使,都「不能得救」,壞的天使肯定是「墮落的」,受到永遠的懲罰。也許這裡指神本意叫那些變節者得救,但他們卻並未得著救恩,猶如前文所述的以色列人,雖然神希望他們成為屬祂的子民。

「假如那些超越的受造物尚且受刑罰,更何況是犯罪的人呢!」54

3. 異教徒的例子 第7節

這個例子表明神刑罰(「永火」)那些不道德和犯姦淫的人,可是猶大時代的假師傅卻認為行這些事是他們的自由。猶大的例子:神命令用「火」燒毀平原上那兩個城市,火是神刑罰的工具;同樣地,那些無視神旨意的假師傅也會受永火的刑罰(參啟二十15)。55 在這裡,猶大似是暗指那些假師傅並不是得救的信徒。

這裡的每一個例子都突顯假師傅的不同錯謬。這是唇徒(或許是真信徒)所犯的叛逆罪行。若部份假師傅是信徒,那「永火」所指的必有別於「地獄」,因信徒不會下地獄。假師傅高傲地離開了本來所擁有的超越地位,還參與異教徒的不道德行為。

「不管是誰、也不論在甚麼情況下犯罪,污穢和叛逆都是令人髮指的,都會受到神的責罰。」56

「當我們檢視這些過去的例子,我們會發現它們並不是按時序列出來…為甚麼不按時序列出各個例子呢?我們相信作者是要讓我們認識叛教的起點在那裡、它的發展和帶來的結果。叛教的起點是不信,不信引致叛逆神。我們不難預測不受約束帶來不忠的後果。在我們的世代,這些事情豈不也是這樣發生 – 不信、叛逆神、反抗他揭示的真理、不道德的行為、無法無天…現今世代,我們也能尋見這些步驟。」57

它們也能在記載在舊約的以色列人歷史中找到。

乙. 現在的錯謬 8-16 節

猶大透過闡述他那個時代假師傅的錯謬,給予他的讀者更加強烈的警告。猶大的寫作特色是先引用舊約的同類事件(第5-7, 11節)、先知的預言(第14-15, 17-18節),然後詮釋假師傅應驗了它們(第8-10, 12-13,16和19節)。

「根據過往叛逆神的人的命運(第5-7節),猶大轉而直接攻擊那些正在衝擊教會的叛徒。」58

1. 錯謬的本質 8-9節

第8節              猶大在這裡使用他剛說明的三個錯謬來指責假師傅。它們是:慾望(第7節),叛逆(第5節)和不敬(第6節)。「作夢」很可能是指以下三個毛病:「污穢身體」、「輕慢主治」和「毀謗在尊位的」;也可能意味猶大指假師傅聲稱他們得到夢或啟示來合理化自己的錯謬。(參西二18)也許他們幻想自己擁有如神所擁有的權柄,在實權者之上的權柄。

「他們那扭曲的觀點和不受約束的行為,使他們活在自己的幻想中,用虛幻來取代神的真理與公義的真實世界。」59

「今天,我們從教會的內部見證了毀壞 – 內在的問題。」60

第9節              假師傅的放肆與米迦勒處理撒旦的爭議時所表現的順服和敬虔,成了一個極大的對比。

「米迦勒似乎是位份最高的天使。」61

米迦勒和魔鬼周旋時一點也不輕率、不高傲,回答時也沒有渺視或粗暴。那麼,那些假師傅豈不應更加順服神、尊敬神嗎?

「他們使用優秀天使的語言;米迦勒也不會使用粗鄙的。」62

「假師傅和米迦勒的對比,重點並不是米迦勒不會對魔鬼無禮,也不是教導我們面對魔鬼時,要保持禮貌。這裡的重點是米迦勒面對魔鬼的指控時,他並不以自己的權柄去反駁,縱使魔鬼惡意中傷他,因他明白自己並不是法官,便不使用自己的能力來駁回魔鬼的指控。米迦勒清楚知道只有主才是法官,他可以做的是請求主去審判撒旦的誹謗。這裡的教導:人並非自主訂定道德標準的權威,沒有人可以為自己定下法則。」63

因魔鬼比我們強多了,跟他直接駁斥或爭辯是危險的。

猶大引用被視為摩西所寫的偽經,只以此為歷史事件。

「不論作者的資料是從那裡得來的,聖靈能使他從中抽取出真實正確的資料。」64

2. 錯謬的嚴重性 10-13節

第10節              假師傅選擇了拒絕神的旨意。因此在這節「毀謗他們所不知道的」,很可能是指神的旨意(參林前二7-16)。

「猶大和他的哥哥雅各一樣,在這短短的書信中多次譴責和言語相關的罪行。」65

假師傅只知滿足自己的私慾,私慾最終將他們摧毀。

「他們像野獸一般讓本能來主導他們的生活;他們擁抱世界的價值觀念;他們的信條是依從肉體的需要。他們失去了一切屬靈的觸覺和洞察力,屬靈的事對他們沒有意義。對他們來說,唯一真實的、唯一的標準就是人類的本能與需要。」66

「猶大在這裡將這兩個問題連結在一起來說明一個真理:如果一個人持續地對屬靈的事視而不見、對神的呼召聽而不聞,並且以自己所定的準則來決定甚麼是至善,最終他們會完全接收不到他們所唾棄了的呼召,他們回到他們曾經因為尋找自由而離開的肉慾漩渦中。」67

「這等禽獸的結局是慢性自殺(有時並不緩慢)是。」68

第11節              「他們有禍了」,這咒詛是他們的厄運(參賽五8-23,哈二6-20,太二十三13-29;林前九16等),與祝福相反。

「叛教者遭厄運的結局,與信徒得到榮耀同樣真確。」69

該隱選擇了不敬虔、追隨肉慾、暴力、貪婪和褻瀆的道路,導致神的審判。他驕傲地認為可以透過自己所作的工和神建立關係;結果他成了一個充滿仇恨的殺人兇手。

「…這裡是作出比較:該隱罪惡的根源是自私和嫉妒。」70

巴蘭的錯謬在於和神的敵人妥協,並且教唆以色列人犯罪和行淫(民三十一16;彼後二15-16;啟二14)。他教米甸人和以色列人私通和引誘他們拜偶像(民三十一16)。巴蘭的「方法」是使用自己的屬靈恩賜謀利;他的「錯謬」是誤以為自己能逃罪。假師傅也放棄神的真理,他們向拜偶像與不道德的行為妥協。他們將會像巴蘭在神的審判下滅亡(民三十一8)。

「巴蘭代表兩種情況:(甲)貪婪的人 – 為了錢財隨時預備好犯罪。(乙)邪惡的人 – 教唆他人犯罪;這是最嚴重的罪行。猶大在這裡宣告他那個時代邪惡的人,為利離開真道,並且教唆他人犯罪。」71

「巴蘭是貪婪宗教領袖的人辦,帶領神的子民走歪路和行淫。」72

「驅使人走巴蘭的路的事物很多,它們包括追求金錢、卓越、名譽、讚賞或權力。」73

「可拉的叛逆」是背叛神和神所指派的領袖 – 摩西和亞倫(民十六1-35)。同樣地,假師傅叛逆神、也叛逆了神指派的領袖(使徒)。最終可拉被消滅了!

巴克萊指出異端諾斯底派其中一個派別「拜蛇教」(Orphites),奉該隱、巴蘭和可拉為舊約的大英雄。74 巴克萊認為猶大是針對諾斯底派。

這三個比喻,每一個都指出不信的不同導向。

「該隱的例子是假信仰。他代表那些假敬虔,氣焰囂張和惡毒的變節者;巴蘭代表貪婪的不信者,也表徵變節者的貪婪、顛覆性和引誘人犯罪的特性;可拉則代表叛逆,為了爭取權力而結黨和煽動暴亂。」75

「該隱的背叛,是不願服在神賜救恩的權柄下,他拒絕神要求他的血祭;巴蘭不願服在神將人分別出來的權柄,他為了利益而濫用神給他的恩賜,並誘使以色列民和其他種族混雜;可拉在事奉神上叛逆神,他否定摩西是神所委任的領袖,並且企圖篡奪摩西的權柄。」76

第12節              猶大在這節中,使用了五個大自然的例子來強調假師傅謬誤的嚴重性(第12-13節)。

第一個例子:如果一條船在航行時不慎遇上了「隱藏」在水面下的珊瑚「礁」,它可以將這條船底部撕下。同樣地,假師傅也可以透過道德敗壞,使一間教會沉淪、毀壞,使其他人在「道德倫理上觸礁」。經文顯示這些假師傅是信徒,最起碼是唇徒,因為他們參與愛筵。愛筵是初期教會敬拜時信徒的親密相交,不僅一起聚餐,當中還有擘餅的儀式(參林前十一17-22)。這節『只知餧養自己』突顯變節者的自我中心(參結三十四2, 8;賽五十六11;約十12-13)。

「猶大似乎意味這些人堅持參加愛筵,並非表達他們的愛心,而是為了滿足自己的口腹。」77

第二個例子:像「沒有雨」的雲。假師傅將注意力集中在自己身上,並且答允帶來更新,但那只是一場表演,是沒有實質的空言(參箴二十五14)。在巴勒斯坦,夏天的雲常常使濕度增高,令酷熱更難抵受。

「他們(叛教者)在講座公開演說和講道,他們懂得怎樣使經文聽起來很屬靈,而其義與神的旨意完全不同。」78

「跟隨這樣的人,會被誘離真道和純正操守而誤入歧途。」79

第三個例子:農夫經常將不結果子的樹拔出來。這比喻假師傅沒有結出屬靈的果子、也沒有能力結出屬靈的果子,他們是死而又死(參詩五十二5;箴二22;耶一10;約十五1-6)。從另一個角度來看,死而又死可以指他們是透徹地死去。80 第三個觀點是他們不單在外表上、而實際上他們也是沒有生命的。81 第四個觀點是他們現在死在罪中,而終局是永死。82

舊約使用「連根拔起」的樹表示神的審判(參詩五十二5;箴二22;耶一10)。翻譯作「秋」的希臘文是指深秋。猶大使用這個字表達他相信他和他的讀者處於末世,距離主再來的日子不遠。這是新約作者十分普遍的觀點(參羅十三11;彼前四7;提前四1;約壹二18)。在深秋,樹葉盡落,枝頭的果實也少。83

「這些人並沒有重生的確據。」84

假師傅(1)像「礁石」具破壞性;(2)像使人不悅的「雲」;(3)像不結果子的「樹」。

第13節              第四個例子:「海浪」的「泡沫」將穢物、碎片和廢料(殘骸,垃圾)沖到岸上。假師傅所到之處,他們散播不道德(「自己可恥的」)和混雜的思想(參賽五十七20),同樣顯而易見。這比喻強調「…這些人躁動和不羈的本性。」85

第五個例子:天空中有一些「星」,它們的移動有別於其它的星體。我們現在把這些「流星」和其他星分野。同樣地,假師傅的行為與那些明亮的星並不和諧。翻譯作星的那一個希臘文(planetes),直譯是流蕩。很久以前觀星家已觀察到它們劃過天際,它們的移動有別於恆星∕行星,我們現在將這些星體識別出來。同樣地假教師的行為如流星,他們偏離軌道,引人走入歧途。

一個關於「流蕩的星」不太有說服力的詮釋指流星在天際閃過,但迅間便在黑暗中消逝。86 「黑暗」遠離光源,表示在信徒群體中的不信者所受的永遠懲罰(「永遠存留」)。

(4)假師傅如「海浪」褻瀆,也(5)如「流蕩的星」不可靠,引人入歧途。

3. 錯謬的後果 14-16節

第14-15節              猶大引用次經以諾壹書,這是聖經中唯一的一次稱以諾是一位先知;也是唯一在洪水前時期被認定的先知。雖然以諾壹書並非神所默示寫成,但祂卻引領猶大引用該書。87 聖靈也曾經帶領保羅引用異教哲學家的話(參徒十七28)。這是末日審判的預言(參馬太福音二十四30;帖後一7-10),這是關於主再來最早的預言。主再來時,如果假師傅當中的不信者還活著,他們將是審判的對象。

猶大引用「亞當的七世孫以諾」似乎是支持創世記第五章的家譜已將每代都列了出來(即一個沒有間斷的家譜)。不過亦有評論指猶大並沒有特別含意,只是按照聖經的記載寫這書,他們相信摩西並沒有將每一代都記錄下來,代與代之間還有沒提及的後代。縱使聖經的其他家譜出現跳代記錄,然而,仔細閱讀創世記第五章的家譜,摩西沒有省略了幾代的餘地。另一個解釋如下:

「…解決這問題的方案是:這被稱為預言的,實際上只是引用了以諾壹書的多個篇章;猶大極可能從以諾壹書六十8援引『亞當的七世孫以諾』而不是引用創世記第五章的家譜,猶大的引句完全出於以諾壹書。雖然以諾壹書的預言並非典範,但這預言卻能在聖經中找到好些平衡的記載和支持,例如:馬太福音二十五31-46。」88

「擁有某種敬虔外貌的人,也會出現不虔誠的行為。若出於一顆不敬虔、不悔改的心,那便是不敬虔的行為了。」89

「在伊甸園的撒旦和在客西馬尼的猶大,他們都用溫婉的說話來掩飾他們的不敬虔行為。」90

第16節              正如剛才引述以諾所說關於「不敬虔」的人的「言」「行」,猶大在這一節作進一步評論,假師傅愛發牢騷,在猶大時期的假師傅抱怨神。

「那些和神斷絕了的人,他們傾向抱怨所有的事情。」91

他們追求感觀刺激和利益(參4,8,10-11節)。他們聲稱有神的真理而持高傲態度,但他們卻遺背使徒所傳的(參但十一36)。他們並且諂媚人以謀取私利。(參雅二1-13)。

「敬畏神的人並不懼怕人,而無視神的人卻以人來取代神的位置。這是追隨者行善或作惡的主要根源。」92

IV 勸勉信徒堅守信仰 17-23 節

猶大向他的讀者講論假師傅的敗壞後,他正面勸勉讀者,儘管他們面對危險,也要持守信仰。

「強烈譴責叛教者後,猶大在這幾節給信徒充滿慈愛的教導,勸勉信徒在叛逆紛擾的處境中,忠於所信的。」93

甲. 提醒信徒要記念使徒的警告 17-19節

第17-18節              「忘記聖經裡神的教導和警告,是靈性敗壞的主因。

「請記著:這是猶大的第一個命令。在總結部份,它和隨後的命令組成一組。」94

這一節的「使徒」,明顯是指十二使徒加上保羅,而不是耶穌差派傳揚福音的信徒群體(參太二十八19-20)。雖然新約的作者也有將後者稱為「使徒」(參羅十六7; 林後八23),不過在這裡,「使徒」是指較少的那群體,他們建立教會,將信仰「一次交付聖徒」(參第3節),猶大勸勉信徒要持守這信仰。按功能而言,也是指使徒(按字義是被差派者)。

猶大(第18節)引用使徒的話作為結語,而不是以使徒的話作參考。它與彼得後書三3模式相同,也該是結語。難以斷定猶大是不是引用彼後三3,但許多保守的學者認為彼得後書的成書日期在猶大書之後。95

「末世」是指包括教會時代和苦難歷史時期的終結。在「末世」之後,神會直接統治人類,首先是千禧年,接著是新天新地的降臨(參提前四1;提後三1等)。這和耶穌基督再來統治世界相關。

至於「好譏誚的人」的譏誚對象,似乎神早已啟示了祂的旨意(參詩三十五16; 箴十四6; 十九25等)。

「這些人…不停嘗試以新的不敬虔形式去取得快感。」96

第19節              假師傅的教導使信徒分裂成兩大類別:堅守使徒的教導和離開信仰的人。雖然假師傅宣稱自己才是那真正屬靈的,但實際上是屬世的,他們所傳的也是不信者的觀點。不信的人,沒有聖靈內住心裡;而那些變節者,也「沒有」讓「聖靈」改變生命。

「那拒絕聖靈的,他們淪落、與動物無異,他們不單本身是不道德的,還將混亂帶進教會。」97

乙. 給信徒正面的勸勉 20-23節

第20節              猶大在這節中使用「卻要」作對比;要將他的讀者和假師傅作區分。因我們是聖靈的殿,被敵人惡意攻擊,我們需要在靈性上「建立自己」,使自己信心「堅強」。(參林前三9-17,弗二20,彼後三18)

「信徒面對這些問題的最佳方法,是增強他們的屬靈免疫力。」98

以下是猶大給信徒的命令。第一個是基本命令,而在第20節下和第21節,他闡述如何做到這一點。

「『造就』(epoikodomountes)」原文是一個複合動詞,用來描繪一座建築物在根基上建造起來;在這裡比喻成長像把一座建築物豎立起來;作者使用現在式來表達,指建立一個強壯和穩定的基督徒品格是一個持續的過程。」99

「我深信神賜給我們66卷書,祂並非叫我們只讀自己喜歡的篇章如約翰福音第三章或第十四章,而是把66卷全部閱讀。」100

「…人們可以在短短幾個小時,將多年的建設毀於一旦。不過一個建設者,比一個毀滅者更有成就感。」101

「至聖的真道」是那「一次交付信徒的真道」(第3節);這是基督徒信仰的根基。

第二:真正的信徒不會沒有聖靈(第19節)。我們有聖靈,並且在聖靈裡禱告。我們祈求神的幫助,使我們的禱告和聖靈的旨意和諧。(弗六18,羅八26-27,林前十二3,加書四6)。換句話說,「在祂的影響下」禱告。102 神是我們最大的幫助,透過禱告,我們穩妥地得到神的幫助。

「靈性的成長和我們隨時隨地禱告息息相關。」103

第21節              第三:我們要「保持」自己在「神的愛」裡(第1,6,13節;參約十五9;羅五5;羅八39)。假如我們離開了神的旨意和神的道,我們便在自己和神之間築起壁壘,阻礙神的愛傾注到我們裡。我們要「恆常」在「基督的愛」裡(約十五9-10;約壹二28)。

「信徒其中一個最大的保障是意識到神的愛。」104

第四:我們要牢記「永生」的應許,並盼望這應許的實現(約壹三2;羅八29),這體現了主耶穌基督給信徒最大的「恩慈」。

「…歡欣是神賜恩的明證。」105

換句話說,猶大告誡他的讀者:只須稍後片時,持守信仰、不要忘記我們的盼望。

「信徒的生命有三個方向:向內是品格的建立(第20節)、向上是與神相交(第20-21節)、向前是期待終極的榮耀成就(第21節)。」106

「這是一幅包含基督徒『信、望、愛』的圖畫。(林前十三13),『在聖靈裡禱告』使這幅圖畫更豐富。而這裡也細心刻畫出聖靈,聖父,耶穌基督是三位一體的神。」107

第22節              第五:猶大勸勉他的讀者要溫柔地幫助(「憐憫」)那些為信仰而掙扎和被假師傅絆倒的信徒。猶大所指的是那些真心尋道,但無法分辨真理和謬誤的人,他們對所信的產生動搖。108 我們不應放棄這些弟兄姊妹,我們應該憐憫他們,幫助他們歸回正道。

第23節              第六:對於那些已經受到神管教的信徒,神任由他們降服假師傅。猶大要求信徒在神的責罰降臨前,將他們從錯誤中救出來(參摩四11;亞三2)。聖經中,「火」表徵神的審判。在這裡,猶大看到神的審判臨到那些犯罪的、隨從假師傅的信徒。109 猶大也看到審判臨到不信的人。110

至於那些完全被異端俘虜的人,我們應同情他們,而不是無情地譴責他們。不過我們要心存「懼怕」,不是懼怕和他們接觸而受感染,而是懼怕因為認同他們的謬誤,使神不悅和受管教。我們應盡量避免和這些人有任何接觸,以免沾染了他們腐敗的言論和行動(參林前五9-11;帖後三14-15)。「衣服」比喻那沾染了屬肉體的行為,例如:個人的習慣和處事方式、言語和擇友等。聖經經常使用「衣服」來比喻那些別人能看見的外在行為。

「猶大對假師傅的批評明顯是嚴厲的,但他並沒有命令我們和這些麻煩製造者對質(只是避免接觸),也沒有命令我們為管教他們而作出計劃。他只表明這些人會受神的審判。」111

巴斯德有一個很好的指引:

「儘管我們因叛教者的錯謬而爭辯,我們要愛他們;縱使我們反對他們的工作,譴責他們所使用的方式,我們要愛他們。必須將他們的人與他們的錯謬分開處理,雖然很困難,但基督的愛在我們心裡,祂給我們智慧的言語。」112

V. 結語 24-25 節

猶大用一首讚美詩來結束他這一封很短的信。當中包括了為收信人禱告。他希望收信人清楚知道神能保守他們,縱使在叛教者的威脅下,仍然能夠持守信仰。

「結束這封信的讚美詩(第24-25節),是舉世公認在聖經中最完美的一首。它的重點是信徒在叛教者的威脅下仍然信心堅固,也為這書帶來一個美妙的結束。」113

「它把作者從那使他煩擾的屬世衝突中抽身,到了永恆的、充滿權能和榮耀的神的寶座前。」114

第24節              我們的信心在於神的大能,祂「保守」我們的安全和信心(「…叫你們無瑕無疵、歡歡喜喜站住他榮耀之前…」)。

「祂能拯救到底(希七25)、祂能堅固信心(參羅十六25)、祂能搭救(希二18)、祂征服萬物(腓三21),祂有能力保守。」115

那翻譯作「失腳」的希臘文含絆倒的意思,不單失去平衡,還跌下。「無瑕無疵」(希臘文 amomos) 並不意味沒有犯罪;這個字的意思是沒有充份理由被控訴(參西一22;彼後三14;啟十四5)。當義人犯了罪,他認罪悔改,離棄他所犯的罪。這是一幅站在耶穌基督審判桌前的圖畫。116 不論按教義或道德而言,這節並非神無條件應許保守所有信徒都不失腳(參第21節)。117

第25節              猶大在這裡遙遙呼應假師傅扭曲神和耶穌基督的真理(第4節)。「榮耀」是神所發的光輝;「威嚴」表達祂的至高無上;「能力」表達神的絕對能力;「權柄」表達神是自主的神。這些都是神永恆(「從萬古以前,並現今,直到永永遠遠」)的屬性。神是那永不變改的神,我們亦應忠心到底。

「猶大如此清晰地表達了他對基督的永恆和在萬有以先便存在的信念,實在無出其右。」118

「猶大…,一名心被煩擾的牧者,他急切要喚醒他的群體,覺醒在他們中間的威脅。猶大所用尖銳的言詞,是古代地中海宗教界常見的修辭手法,不過這不能完全解釋猶大如此熱切的因由。對於猶大和初期教會大部份信徒來說,信耶穌是一件關乎生與死的事情。任何人或任何事威脅信仰生活,誠然是致死的敵人。」119

一位真正的基督徒會否認他曾認信賜他永生神的兒子耶穌基督嗎?這樣的事情在今天的教會裡經常發生,有些基督徒改信不認基督的信仰,如伊斯蘭教、世上其它主要宗教或異端。有些年青信徒被他們所尊敬的教授說服,認為他們曾信的並不真確。

有人會說:沒有真基督徒會否認他們對神的兒子耶穌的信;那否認的,從始至終未曾真正相信,這等人可能從未成為真正的基督徒,最多只是唇徒。可是,經文並未否定真基督徒可能被假師傅蠱惑,而改變他們對基督耶穌的認信。因此,否認信心的真基督徒不會失去救恩,人因信基督而得救,神宣告那人為義,賜聖靈印記,並應許他們和祂的愛永不分離(參約十28;羅八31-39等)。這是蒙耶穌基督保守(第1節),已重生(約三1-21)的,永不能「未重生」。我們得救非因自己的善行,同樣地,不會因我們所做的錯事而失落救恩,儘管這不是神為祂的兒女所定下的旨意。

猶大可以明確地指這信是寫給那群未得救的變節者,可是他沒有這樣做。他寫信給基督徒,警告所有人,包括基督徒和非基督徒。因此,這書信十分重要。

Bibliography

Alford, Henry. The Greek Testament. 4 vols. London: Rivingtons, 1859-1861.

Allman, James E. “Suffering in the Non-Pauline Epistles.” In Why, O God? Suffering and Disability in the Bible and the Church, pp. 195-205. Edited by Larry J. Waters and Roy B. Zuck. Wheaton: Crossway, 2011.

Bailey, Mark L., and Thomas L. Constable. The New Testament Explorer. Nashville: Word Publishing Co., 1999. Reissued as Nelsons New Testament Survey. Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1999.

Barclay, William. The Letters of John and Jude. The Daily Study Bible series. 2nd ed. Edinburgh: Saint Andrew Press, 1962.

Bateman, Herbert W., IV. “Rebellion and God’s Judgment in the Book of Jude.” Bibliotheca Sacra 170:680 (October-December 2013):453-77.

Bauckham, Richard J. Jude, 2 Peter. Word Biblical Commentary series. Waco: Word Books, 1983.

Baxter, J. Sidlow. Explore the Book. 6 vols. in 1. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960.

Bigg, Charles. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude. International Critical Commentary series. 2nd ed. and reprint ed. Edinburgh: T. and T. Clark, 1961.

Blum, Edwin A. “Jude.” In Hebrews-Revelation. Vol. 12 of The Expositors Bible Commentary. 12 vols. Edited by Frank E. Gaebelein. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1981.

Calvin, John. Institutes of the Christian Religion. The Library of Christian Classics series, volumes 20 and 21. Edited by John T. McNeill. Translated by Ford Lewis Battles. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1960.

Carson, Donald A., and Douglas J. Moo. An Introduction to the New Testament. 2nd ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005.

Cedar, Paul A. James, 1, 2 Peter, Jude. The Communicator’s Commentary series. Waco: Word Books, 1984.

Coder, S. Maxwell. Jude: The Acts of the Apostates. Chicago: Moody Press, 1958.

Darby, John Nelson. Synopsis of the Books of the Bible. 5 vols. Revised ed. New York: Loizeaux Brothers Publishers, 1942.

DeGraaf, David. “Some Doubts about Doubt: The New Testament Use of Diakrino.” Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 48:8 (December 2005):733-55.

Desjardins, Michel. “The Portrayal of the Dissidents in 2 Peter and Jude: Does It Tell Us More About the ‘Godly’ Than the ‘Ungodly’?” Journal for the Study of the New Testament 30 (June 1987):89-102.

Fanning, Buist M. “A Theology of Peter and Jude” In A Biblical Theology of the New Testament, pp. 437-71. Edited by Roy B. Zuck. Chicago: Moody Press, 1994.

Gaebelein, Arno C. The Annotated Bible. 4 vols. Reprint ed. Chicago: Moody Press, and New York: Loizeaux Brothers, Inc., 1970.

A Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament. By C. G. Wilke. Revised by C. L. Wilibald Grimm. Translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer, 1889.

Green, Michael. The Second Epistle General of Peter and the General Epistle of Jude. Tyndale New Testament Commentaries series. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1975.

Guthrie, Donald. New Testament Introduction. 3 vol. 2nd ed. London: Tyndale Press, 1966.

Henry, Matthew. Commentary on the Whole Bible. One volume ed. Edited by Leslie F. Church. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing Co., 1961.

Hiebert, D. Edmond. “An Exposition of Jude 3-4.” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:566 (April- June 1985):142-51.

_____. “An Exposition of Jude 12-16.” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:567 (July-September 1985):238-49.

_____. “An Exposition of Jude 17-23.” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:568 (October-December 1985):355-66.

_____. Second Peter and Jude: An Expositional Commentary. Greenville, S.C.: Unusual Publications, 1989.

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia. Edited by James Orr. 1939 ed. 5 vols. S.v. “Jude, The Epistle of,” by William G. Moorehead. 3:1767-71.

Jamieson, Robert; A. R. Fausset; and David Brown. Commentary Practical and Explanatory on the Whole Bible. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1961.

Johnston, Jason. “The Multichiastic Structure of Jude and Its Contribution to the Purpose of the Epistle.” Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 2008.

Kelly, J. N. D. A Commentary on the Epistles of Peter and Jude. Thornapple Commentaries series. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1981.

Lange, John Peter, ed. Commentary on the Holy Scripture. 12 vols. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960. Vol. 12: James—Revelation, by J. P.

Lange, J. J. Van Oosterzee, G. T. C. Fronmüller, and Karl Braune. Enlarged and edited by E. R. Craven. Translated by J. Isidor Mombert and Evelina Moore.

Lawlor, George Lawrence. Translation and Exposition of the Epistle of Jude. Nutley, N.J.: Presbyterian and Reformed Publishing Co., 1972.

Lenski, Richard C. H. The Interpretation of the Epistles of St. Peter, St. John and St. Jude. Reprint ed. Minneapolis: Angsburg Publishing House, 1961.

Litfin, A. Duane. “A Biblical Strategy for Confronting the Cults.” Bibliotheca Sacra 135:539 (July-September 1978):232-40.

MacDonald, William. II Peter and Jude: The Christian and Apostasy. Wheaton: Harold Shaw Publishers, 1972.

Mayor, J. B. “The General Epistle of Jude.” In The Expositors Greek Testament 5 (1910):207-78. 5 vols. 4th ed. Edited by W. Robertson Nicoll. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1900-1912.

McGee, J. Vernon. Thru the Bible with J. Vernon McGee. 5 vols. Pasadena, Calif.: Thru The Bible Radio; and Nashville: Thomas Nelson, Inc., 1983.

McNeile, A. H. An Introduction to the Study of the New Testament. 2nd ed. Revised by C. S. C. Williams. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965.

Morgan, G. Campbell. An Exposition of the Whole Bible. Westwood, N.J.: Fleming H. Revell, 1959.

_____. Living Messages of the Books of the Bible. 2 vols. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1912.

_____. The Unfolding Message of the Bible. Westwood, N.J.: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1961.

The Nelson Study Bible. Edited by Earl D. Radmacher. Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1997.

Pentecost, Edward C. “Jude.” In The Bible Knowledge Commentary: New Testament, pp. 917-24. Edited by John F. Walvoord and Roy B. Zuck. Wheaton: Scripture Press Publications, Victor Books, 1983.

Plummer, Alfred. “The General Epistles of St. James and St. Jude.” In An Exposition of the Bible. 6 vols. Hartford, Conn.: S. S. Scranton Co., 1903.

Reicke, Bo. The Epistles of James, Peter, and Jude. Anchor Bible series. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., 1964.

Robertson, Archibald Thomas. Word Pictures in the New Testament. 6 vols. Nashville: Broadman Press, 1931.

Salmond, S. D. F. “Jude.” In The Pulpit Commentary. Reprint ed. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., n.d.

Savelle, Charles H. “Canonical and Extracanonical Portraits of Balaam.” Bibliotheca Sacra 166:664 (October-December 2009):387-404.

Senior, Donald. “The Letters of Jude and Second Peter.” The Bible Today 25:4 (July 1987):209-14.

Sidebottom, E. M. James, Jude, 2 Peter. New Century Bible Commentary series. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., and London: Marshall, Morgan & Scott, 1982.

Thiessen, Henry Clarence. Introduction to the New Testament. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1962.

Thompson, R. Duane. “Jude.” In The Wesleyan Bible Commentary. 6 vols. Edited by Charles W. Carter. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1964-1969.

The Twentieth Century New Testament: A Translation into Modern English. Chicago: Moody Press, n.d.

Wallace, David H. “Jude.” In The Wycliffe Bible Commentary, pp. 1487-90. Edited by Charles F. Pfeiffer and Everett F. Harrison. Chicago: Moody Press, 1962.

Walvoord, John F. Daniel: The Key to Prophetic Revelation. Chicago: Moody Press, 1971.

Wand, J. W. C. The General Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude. Westminster Commentaries series. London: Methuen & Co., 1934.

Ward, Ronald A. The Epistles of John and Jude: A Study Manual. Shield Bible Study series. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1965.

Wiersbe, Warren W. The Bible Exposition Commentary. 2 vols. Wheaton: Scripture Press Publications, Victor Books, 1989.

Wilkin, Robert N. “He Is Able to Keep You From Stumbling! Jude 24.” Grace Evangelical Society News 9:1 (January-February 1994):2-3.

Williams, Nathaniel Marshman. “Commentary on the Epistle of Jude.” In An American Commentary on the New Testament. 1888. Reprint ed. Philadelphia: American Baptist Publication Society, n.d.

Witmer, John A. “The Truth about Error.” Bibliotheca Sacra 124:495 (July-September 1967):248-53.

Wolff, Richard. A Commentary on the Epistle of Jude. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960.

Woods, Guy N. A Commentary on the New Testament Epistles of Peter, John, and Jude. Nashville: Gospel Advocate Co., 1954.


1 See Donald A. Carson and Douglas J. Moo, An Introduction to the New Testament, pp. 690-92.

2 See J.B. Mayor, “the General Epistle of Jude”, in The Expositor’s Greek Testament, 5:226-29.

3 Richard L. Bauckham, Jude, 2 Peter, p. 3.

4 Ibid., p. 16.

5 For discussion of the relationship of 2 Peter and Jude, see D. Edmond Hiebert, Second Peter and Jude, pp. 196-200; and Charles Bigg, A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude, pp. 216-24.

6 See Donald Guthrie, New Testament Introduction, 3:229-33.

7 Hiebert, p. 185. See pp. 185-92 for evidence of Jude’s authenticity.

8 E.G., Bauckham, p.3. See Bigg, pp. 305-10, for references to Jude in the writings of the early church.

9 See Jason Johnston, “The Multichiastic Structure of Jude and its Contribution to the Purpose of the Epistle” (Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 2008).

10 Edward C. Pentecost, “Jude,” in The Bible Knowledge Commentary: New Testament, p. 918.

11 The Nelson Study Bible, p. 2156

12 Michael Green, The Second Epistle General of Peter and the General Epistle of Jude, p. 39. Cf. A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6:184.

13 G Campbell Morgan, An Exposition of the Whole Bible, p. 532.

14 See Herbert W. bateman IV, “Rebellion and Gods Judgment in the Book of Jude”, Bibliotheca Sacra 170:680 (October-December 2013):453-77.

15 Adapted from G. Campbell Morgan, Living Messages of the Books of the Bible, 2:2:195-208.

16 S. Maxwell Coder, Jude: The Acts of the Apostates, p. 7.

17 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 192.

18 Paul A. Cedar, James, 1, 2 Peter, Jude, p. 244.

19 Pentecost, p. 919.

20 R. Duane Thompson, “Jude,” in The Wesleyan Bible Commentary, 6:389.

21 J. W. C. Wand, The General Epistles of St. Peter and St. Jude, p. 196.

22 Matthew Henry, Commentary on the Whole Bible, p.1967.

23 D. Edmond Hiebert, “An Exposition of Jude 3-4,” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:566 (April-June 1985):144.

24 G. F. C. Fronmüller, “The Epistle General of Jude,” in Langes Commentary on the Holy Scriptures,12:5:13.

25 Guy N. Woods, A Commentary on the New Testament Epistles of Peter, John, and Jude, p. 385.

26 Cedar, p. 250.

27 G. Campbell Morgan, Living Messages of the Books of the Bible, 2:2:203.

28 Nathaniel M. Williams, “Commentary on the Epistle of Jude,” in An American Commentary on the New Testament, 7:8.

29 J. Vernon McGee, “The General Epistle of Jude”, in An American Commentary on the New Testament, 7:8

30 William Barclay, The Letters of John and Jude, p. 211.

31 E. M. Sidebottom, James, Jude, 2 Peter, p. 83. Cf. Pentecost, p. 920.

32 Buist M. Fanning, “A Theology of Peter and Jude,” in A Biblical Theology of the New Testament, p. 468.

33 J.N. Darby, Synopsis of the Books of the Bible, 5:555.

34 Bauckham, p. 11.

35 McGee, 5:852.

36 Mayor, 5:256

37 Green, p. 162.

38 E.g., Michael Desjardins, “The Portrayal of the Dissidents in 2 Peter and Jude: Does It Tell Us More About the ‘Godly’ Than the ‘Ungodly’?” Journal for the Study of the New Testament 30 (June 1987):93-95.

39 See J. N. D. Kelly, A Commentary on the Epistles of Peter and Jude, p. 252; J. B. Mayor, “The General Epistle of Jude,” in The Expositors Greek Testament, 5:257; and Henry Alford, The Greek Testament, 4:531.

40 E.g., Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 226; George Lawrence Lawlor, Translation and Exposition of the Epistle of Jude, p. 60, footnote 57; and Bigg, p. 327.

41 Bauckham, p. 41.

42 McGee, 5:854

43 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 185.

44 Arno C. Gaebelein, The Annotated Bible, 4:179.

45 Henry, p. 1968.

46 Green, p. 164.

47 E.g., Edwin Blum, “Jude,” in Hebrews-Revelation, vol. 12 of The Expositors Bible Commentary, p. 389.

48 Sidebottom, p. 85.

49 See Warren W. Wiersbe, The Bible Exposition Commentary, 2:551-52, for refutation of this view.

50 John Calvin, Institutes of the Christian Religion, 1:14:15.

51 E.g., International Standard Bible Encyclopaedia, s.v. “Jude, the Epistle of,” by William G. Moorehead, 3:1771).

52 E.g., Lenski, pp. 610-12, 650-52.

53 Mayor, 5:260.

54 Ronald A. Ward, The Epistles of John and Jude: A Study Manual, p. 81.

55 See James E. Allman, “Suffering in the Non-Pauline Epistles”, in Why, O God?  Suffering and Disability in the Bible and Church, p. 205.

56 Alfred Plummer, “The General Epistles of St. James and St. Jude,” in An Exposition of the Bible, 6:655.

57 Arno C. Gaebelein, The Annotated Bible, 4:179-80. See also Richard Lenski, The Interpretation of the Epistles of St. Peter, St. John and St. Jude, p. 616; Morgan, 2:2:198.

58 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 241.

59 Ibid., p. 243.

60 McGee, 5:860.

61 John F. Walvoord, Daniel: The Key to Prophetic Revelation, p. 246.

62 Plummer, 6:656.

63 Bauckham, p. 61.

64 Lenski, p. 641. See Bauckham, pp. 65-76, for an extended excursus on the background and source of verse 9.

65 Richard Wolff, A Commentary on the Epistle of Jude, pp. 91-92. Cf. vv. 8, 10, 11, 15, 16.

66 Barclay, p. 222.

67 Green, p. 171.

68 Williams, 7:14.

69 Coder, p. 72.

70 Alford, 4:536

71 Barclay, p. 225.

72 Blum, p. 392. Cf. Charles H. Savelle, “Canonical and Extracanonical Portraits of Balaam,” Bibliotheca Sacra 166:664 (October-December 2009):387-404.

73 McGee, 5:863.

74 Barclay, p. 192.

75 Lawlor, p. 83. Italics added for clarification.

76 Wiersbe, 2:555. Italics his.

77 D. Edmond Hiebert, “An Exposition of Jude 12-16,” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:567 (July-September 1985):240-41.

78 McGee,5:864

79 Hiebert, p. 242.

80 The Twentieth Century New Testament.

81 Alford, 4:537.

82 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 261.

83 Kelly, p. 272.

84 Williams, 7:16.

85 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 12-16,” p. 243.

86 See Kelly, p. 274, for a refutation of this view.

87 Cf. Fanning, p. 465; Bauckham, p. 96.

88 David H. Wallace, “Jude,” in The Wycliffe Bible Commentary, p. 1489.

89 Wolff, p. 113.

90 Williams, 7:18.

91 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 12-16,” p. 247.

92 Mayor, 5:272.

93 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 273.

94 Green, p. 180.

95 See my discussion of this subject in my notes on 2 Peter.

96 D. Edmond Hiebert, “An Exposition of Jude 17-23,” Bibliotheca Sacra 142:568 (October-December 1985):358.

97 S. D. F. Salmond, “Jude,” in The Pulpit Commentary, p. 14.

98 A. Duane Litfin, “A Biblical Strategy for Confronting the Cults,” Bibliotheca Sacra 135:539 (July- September 1978):235. Cf. 1 Pet. 1:5-7.

99 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 17-23,” p. 360. Cf. Phil. 2:12.

100 McGee, 5:871.

101 Cedar, p. 258.

102 Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown, p.1521.

103 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 17-23,” p. 361.

104 Plummer, 6:662.

105 Pentecost, p. 923.

106 Hiebert, “An Exposition . . . 17-23,” p. 362.

107 Idem, Second Peter . . ., p. 286.

108 David DeGraaf, “Some Doubts about Doubt: The New Testament Use of Diakrino,” Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 48:8 (December 2005):742-43.

109 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 290; Lawlor, p. 127. Cf. John 15:6; 1 Cor. 3:15.

110 Coder, p. 116. Cf. Rev. 20:15.

111 The Neslon…, p.2156.

112 J. Sidlow Baxter, Explore the Book, 6:316.

113 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 204.

114 Bo Reicke, The Epistles of James, Peter, and Jude, p. 217.

115 William MacDonald, II Peter and Jude: The Christian and Apostasy, p. 92.

116 Hiebert, Second Peter . . ., p. 295.

117 See Robert N. Wilkin, “He Is Able to Keep You From Stumbling! Jude 24,” Grace Evangelical Society News 9:1 (January-February 1994):2-3.

118 Bigg, p. 344.

119 Donald Senior, “The Letters of Jude and Second Peter,” The Bible Today 25:4 (July 1987):211.

15. Study and Exposition of Romans 6:1-14

A. Introduction

In his sermon, “Why Christ Had To Die,” author and pastor Stuart Briscoe says:

Many years ago when the children were small, we went for a little drive in the lovely English countryside, and there was some fresh snow. I saw a lovely field with not a single blemish on the virgin snow. I stopped the car, and I vaulted over the gate, and I ran around in a great big circle striding as wide as I could. Then I came back to the kids, and I said, “Now, children, I want you to follow in my footsteps. So I want you to run around that circle in the snow, and I want you to put your feet where your father put his feet.

Well, David tried and couldn’t quite make it. Judy, our over achiever, was certain she would make it; she couldn’t make it. Pete, the little kid took a great run at it, put his foot in my first footprint and then strode out as far as he could and fell on his face. His mother picked him up as he cried.

She said to me, “What are you trying to do?”

I said, “I’m trying to get a sermon illustration.”

I said, “Pete, come here.” I picked up little Peter and put his left foot on my foot, and I put his right foot on my foot. I said, “Okay, Pete, let’s go.” I began to stride one big stride at a time with my hands under his armpits and his feet lightly on mine.

Well, who was doing it? In a sense he was doing it because I was doing it. In a sense there was a commitment of the little boy to the big dad, and some of the properties of the big dad were working through the little boy.

In exactly the same way, in our powerlessness we can’t stride as wide as we should. We don’t’ walk the way we should. We don’t hit the target the way we ought. It isn’t that at every point we are as bad as we could be. It’s just that at no point are we as good as we should be. Something’s got to be done.47

Well God has done that something. Because of our fallen nature we are unable to meet the demands of the law; we are unable to stride the distance set out by our Father. So like the little boy who placed his feet on his father’s, we too are making the grade because Christ himself is holding us up by virtue of our union with him. Through our union with him, we are freed from our sinful passions and permanently oriented toward righteousness. This does not mean that we will never sin, but it does mean that the Christian’s true heart, no matter how great the struggle (in the “now-not-yet”), will always be toward God and righteousness.

Again, God has brought us into union with his Son Jesus Christ, so that just as he died to sin and rose from the dead, we too might die to sin and live for righteousness; we too can now meet the standard demanded by the Father’s holiness. This union with Christ is the grace to which Paul refers in 6:1-14. It is completely incongruous to Paul that we should be united to Christ himself and then continue in sin. This is Paul’s point in Romans 6:1-14.

B. Translation of Passage in NET

6:1 What shall we say then? Are we to remain in sin so that grace may increase? 6:2 Absolutely not! How can we who died to sin still live in it? 6:3 Or do you not know that as many as were baptized into Christ were baptized into his death? 6:4 Therefore we have been buried with him through baptism into death, in order that just as Christ was raised from the dead through the glory of the Father, so we too may walk in new life. 6:5 For if we have become united with him in the likeness of his death, we will certainly also be united in the likeness of his resurrection. 6:6 We know that our old man was crucified with him so that the body of sin would no longer dominate us, so that we would no longer be enslaved to sin. 6:7 (For someone who has died has been freed from sin.) 6:8 Now if we died with Christ, we believe that we will also live with him. 6:9 We know that since Christ was raised from the dead, he is never going to die again; death no longer has mastery over him. 6:10 For the death he died, he died to sin once for all; but the life he lives, he lives to God. 6:11 So you too consider yourselves dead to sin, but alive to God in Christ Jesus. 6:12 Therefore do not let sin reign in your mortal body so that you obey its desires, 6:13 and do not present your members to sin as instruments to be used for unrighteousness, but present yourselves to God as those who are alive from the dead and your members to God as instruments to be used for righteousness. 6:14 For sin will have no mastery over you, because you are not under law but under grace.

C. Full Exegetical Outline

Idea: The reason Christians should not present themselves to sin, but rather to God, is because they have been united with Christ in his death to sin and in his resurrection to new life; they are not under law, but under grace. 

I. Christians should not continue in sin because they have been united with Christ in his death through baptism and are therefore also united with him in his resurrection to new life  (6:1-10).

A. Should Christians remain in sin so that grace may increase? No. Christians have died to sin and can no longer live in it (6:1-2).

1. Should Christians remain in sin so that grace may increase (6:1)?

2. No. Christians have died to sin and can no longer live in it (6:2).

B. Christians were baptized into the death of Christ and have therefore died to sin with him and have been raised to walk in new life (6:3-5).

1. Christians have been baptized into the death of Christ (6:3).

2. Christians have been buried with Christ through baptism into death (6:4a)

3. Christians have been raised with Christ that they might walk in new life (6:4b).

4. Christians have been united with Christ in his death and also similarly in his resurrection (6:5).

C. The Christian’s old man was crucified with Christ with the result that the body of sin need not dominate him/her any longer (6:6-7).

1. The old man was crucified with Christ so that it might no longer dominate us with the result that we remain enslaved to sin (6:6)

2. Death releases us from sin (6:7).

D. Christ, being unable to die again, has mastery over death and now lives permanently to God (6:8-10).

1. Christians have died with Christ (6:8a)

2. Christians live with Christ (6:8b)

3. Christ was raised from the dead (6:9a)

4. Christ will never die again (6:9b)

5. Death no longer has mastery over Christ (6:9c)

6. Christ died to sin once for all (6:10a)

7. Christ now lives to God (6:10b)

II. Christians should consider themselves dead to sin and alive to God, offering their bodies to him and not to sin, for sin shall not be their master because they are not under law, but under grace (6:11-14).

A. Christians should consider themselves dead to sin and alive to God in Christ Jesus, presenting themselves not to sin as instruments of unrighteousness, but to God as instruments of righteousness (6:11-13).

1. Christians should consider themselves dead to sin, but alive to God in Christ Jesus (6:11).

2. Christians should not let sin reign in their mortal bodies so that they obey its desires (6:12).

3. Christians should present their bodies to God for righteousness and not to sin for unrighteousness (6:13).

B. Sin will have not mastery over Christians because they are not under law, but under grace (6:14).

1. Sin will have no mastery over Christians (6:14a).

2. Christians are not under law (6:14b).

3. Christians are under grace (6:14c).

D. Simple Point and Homiletical Outline

Idea: If God’s grace increases as my sin increases, why not just continue to sin?

I. Understand That You’re Dead To Sin and Now Have Life in Christ (6:1-10)

A. The Question (6:1-2)

B. Our Baptism with Christ (6:3-4)

C. Our Union with Christ (6:5)

D. Our Old Man Crucified (6:6-7)

E. Christ’s Death—The Paradigm (6:8-10)

II. Present Yourself to God (6:11-14)

A. Consider Yourself Dead to Sin/Alive to God (6:11)

B. Offer Yourself To God and not to Sin (6:12-13)

C. Sin Will Not Have Mastery Over You (6:14)

E. Exposition Proper

Justification and sanctification are two different realities, but they must never be separated and isolated one from the other. If they become totally separated, the logical end is license. If they become merged together, a “works” oriented salvation results.

Paul is moving from freedom from the penalty of sin, (1:18-5:21) to freedom from the power of sin (6:1ff). He has explained “the righteous by faith” in 1:18-5:21, now he is moving on to explain “shall live” and fill out the meaning of the Habakkuk quotation in 1:17—the theme verse of the entire letter. If the cross was sufficient to deliver from the penalty of sin, here it is sufficient to deliver from the power of sin.

6:1 Paul says, “What shall we say then? Are we to remain (ἐπιμένωμεν, epimenōmen) in sin (i.e., a lifestyle characterized by sin) so that grace may increase? En route to developing his argument concerning the gospel, Paul has thus far been in the habit of asking questions in order to prevent misunderstanding. Such is the case here (cf. also 3:1, 5, 9, 27, 4:1; 6:1, 15; 7:7). This particular question is related to the statement in 5:20 where Paul argued that “where sin increased, grace multiplied all the more.” Someone may be tempted to think, having just read 5:20, that since grace increased where sin increased, why not just continue to sin? Correct premise, wrong inference! Grace does indeed increase where sin increases, but this in no way leads to the inference that we should just continue to sin! Paul heads this off at the pass! Compare 1:18 in this light. In short, the question of 6:1 is rhetorical. It involves that which is morally right and should be obvious to any believer. Its transparent nature obvious, Paul nonetheless gives a clear answer in 6:2.

6:2 Should we continue to sin, even though grace increases? In answer to this, Paul says, emphatically and without qualification:Absolutely not (μὴ γένοιτο, mē genoito)! Let there be no mistake about it, Paul’s gospel is not one of cheap grace that leads to license. He asks, “How can we who died to sin still live in it?” The Christian has experienced a definitive break with the realm and power of sin through dying to it at the point of conversion (cf. 5:3-4ff). How can we live under its sway and render service to it when we, in fact, have died to it? 

6:3-4 But how did that death to sin take place? Paul gives the answer here in v. 3. Beginning his sentence with do you not know (ἀγνοεῖτε, agnoeite), he implies that his readers probably know something of this teaching regarding baptism and union with Christ, but perhaps not exactly as he had taught it.

The phrases baptized into Christ (ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν  ᾿Ιησοῦν, ebaptisthēmen eis Christon Iēsoun) and baptized into his death (εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν, eis ton thanaton ebaptisthēmen) have been variously interpreted, especially the preposition eis (“into”).  It seems best, however, in light of v. 4 to take the preposition as meaning “baptized into union with Christ” and baptized into union with his death.” The reason is as follows: verse 4 begins with “therefore” indicating that it is drawing a conclusion from v. 3. The conclusion, however, is that we have been buried “with him.” The “with him” language implies union with Christ in v. 3.

The means by which we are buried with Christ in his death is through baptism (διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος, dia tou baptismatos). It must be stated up front that it is highly unlikely that Paul is talking about spiritual baptism (such as we might have in 1 Cor 12:13). Water baptism seems to be his point.

Now some commentators read this passage and argue that either water baptism by itself saves a person (sacramentalism; ex opere operato) or that baptism is at least required in order to be saved. Both of these explanations, even though they make good sense of the preposition “through,” must be rejected. First, Paul has argued at length to this point in Romans that a person is declared righteous by faith apart from any works, whether they be religious works in general or the performance of religious rites, such as circumcision (3:20-22, 28; 4:2-8, 9-12).

Second, baptism is not the main point of this paragraph nor is a baptismal theology being developed. Indeed, Paul is not focusing on the nature of baptism, but rather on our death and resurrection with Christ.

But why, then, choose water baptism? The reason Paul chose water baptism is because in the early church it had become a sure sign that a person was a Christian. It was equated with the salvation process so closely that in many cases it came to stand for the reality of personal salvation itself (Acts 2:38; 1 Pet 3:21). Thus it presupposed faith for its meaning and true faith always led to a person being baptized. We do the same thing today. In certain Protestant denominations if a person is asked how they became a Christian he/she may answer that they “walked the isle” on such and such a date. Well, we all know that “walking the isle” never saved anyone, yet the experience is often so closely associated with the time when a person initially trusts in Christ that the sign can stand for the reality.

The goal (cf. ἵνα, hina) of our union with Christ in his death, which occurred when we were baptized (i.e., “baptism” as a metonymy for salvation) is that just as (ὥσπερ, hōsper) Christ was raised from the dead through the glory of the Father, that is, through the power of the living God, so we too may walk in new life (ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν, en kainotēti zōēs peripatēsōmen). The resurrection of Christ as an eschatological reality ushered in a new era of salvation, and all those connected to him in his death and resurrection enter into this new life—a “new covenant” life inaugurated and characterized by the indwelling Spirit (cf. 7:6).

6:5 In v. 5 Paul further explains (γάρ, gar) how it is that we can walk in new life. We do so because of the ongoing effects of our participation in the death of Christ and our current participation in the resurrection of Christ. The future tense, “we will certainly also be united,” refers not to the eschatological future (cf. John 5:28-29), but rather to the future with respect to the logic of the process of salvation. First, we are reckoned dead with Christ, then we are reckoned to participate in Christ’s resurrection. The whole tenor of the passage argues for present participation in the resurrection of Christ as the means by which we might walk in new life (cf. v. 4 and the “for” beginning v. 5). While the ultimate goal of the resurrection will be culminated in the future, it is, nonetheless, a present reality for the believer.

What does Paul mean by the terms united (σύμφυτοι, sumphutoi) and likeness (ὁμοιώματι, homoiōmati)? The term “united” is used in many different contexts, including horticultural—a nuance which works well here, especially with the thought of dying, rising, and “new life” (cf. John 12:24). The believer has been grafted into the death and resurrection of Christ and draws spiritual life from that connection (cf. John 15:1-11).

The term “likeness” could imply that believers were united with Christ in something like his death, but not really his death. This is not a necessary conclusion from the term (cf. Phil 2:7) and strains the clear meaning of 6:3. The focus in vv. 3-4 is on our initial union with Christ at baptism. The past tense (aorist) verbs indicate this. The focus in v. 5 is on the ongoing effects of this union. This is made clear through the use of the perfect tense, we have become (γεγόναμεν, gegonamen). Thus Paul is now stressing present realities still in motion as a result of that initial union. Likeness, then, refers to certain “attributes” or “qualities that characterize” Christ’s death. Thus, insofar as his death was a death to sin (6:10), so also our lives are characterized by this likeness, i.e., death to sin.

6:6 In v. 6 Paul takes up and elaborates further on the thought of v. 5. When he says we know (τοῦτο γινώσκοντες, touto ginōskontes) he does not mean we know “by personal experience.” What we know is what Paul says next, namely, that our old man was crucified with Christ. This is something we believe by faith. It is not available to the five senses.

But what does Paul mean by our old man (ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ho palaios hēmon anthrōpos)? Some understand the phrase to refer to parts of a person. If you’re a Christian, the other part is the “new man” (Eph 2:15; 4:22, 24; Col. 3:9-11).

The “old man” language refers to who we were in our totality apart from Christ and in Adam, apart from the new era of grace and in the old era of sin, death, and judgment. It refers to the sphere of our existence before our union with Christ in the new era. Thus it refers to two different humanities with two different heads: Adam and Christ.48 It is both individualistic and corporate in focus. The individualistic focus can be seen in the fact that “the old man” was crucified with Christ. Also, the fact that Paul refers to “he (someone) who has died is freed from sin” (v.7) stresses the individualistic conception of “the old man.” But there is also a corporate focus in the expression “old man-new man.” In Ephesians 2:15 Paul refers to the new man as the sphere of existence of Jew and Gentile (Gal 3:28).

The expression, “body of sin” does not refer to sin as some entity, per se, but rather, as Paul points out in vv. 12-14, to my physical body as an instrument for the expression of sin. Assumed in this idea is a view of the entire man as existing completely within the realm of sin’s dominion. Our old man was crucified so that the body of sin would no longer dominate (καταργηθῇ, katargēsthē) us. The verb dominate is an excellent translation of the Greek katargēsthē, for while the crucifixion was definitive, the old age continues on and may attempt to bring us under its sway if allowed. We were crucified, it was not crucified. The ultimate goal of the crucifixion of our old man was so that we would no longer be enslaved to sin (τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, tou mēketi douleuein hēmas tē hamartia). 

6:7 In v. 7 Paul clearly demonstrates—perhaps through a well known truth—why the crucifixion of our old man enables us to remain free of slavery to sin. This is so because the person who has died has been freed from sin (δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, dedikaiōtai apo tēs hamartias). Death to sin entails the idea of freedom from it. The term “freed” (dedikaiōtai) could be translated “justified,” but in collocation with the preposition apo, and in a context where justification is not the issue, but progressive sanctification, “freed” is better.

6:8-10 The point of vv. 8-9 is this: if we have died with Christ we will certainly live with him since he died to death once and for all, it can, therefore, never hold sway over him again and subsequently he lives to God.

What does Paul mean when he says, “we…will live” with him (v. 8)? Is he thinking about our present experience as Christians, or is he thinking about the future? This is essentially the same question we faced in v. 5. Some scholars argue that the future tense points to the time of the eschatological future when in resurrected bodies we will be with the Lord. As it stands, this is not the best answer.

Others argue that while Paul uses the future tense, he is describing present realities. This view has much more to commend it. First, the theme of the paragraph as announced in vv. 1-2 concerns questions about living in sin in the present. Second, it is noted that in v. 2, where Paul is clearly referring to our present existence, that the future “will live” is used. Third, the focus in vv. 3-4 is on the present reality of our walk in light of our baptism into Christ’s death. Thus it parallels v. 8. Fourth, the verb “will live with him” in v. 8 seems to parallel “has been freed” in v. 7. If the former (v.7) is a present reality, why not the latter? Fifth, Christ’s resurrection life is a present reality for Paul (vv. 4, 5, 9, 10). Since, then, we are said to “live with him” (note the sun [“with”] prefix on suzēsomen), the living must take place in our present experience as Christians. Sixth, we have been “buried with Christ,” we have been “united with Christ,” and our old man has been “crucified with Christ.” It is likely, since these refer to past events with present implications, that when Paul uses another sun verb, namely, suzēsomen, that he is referring to a past event with present implications, i.e., our enjoyment of resurrection life from the moment of conversion. Seventh, the imperatives of vv. 12-14, especially presenting ourselves to God alive, imply current participation with Christ in his resurrection (cf. the “so you too” in v. 11). This is further confirmed by the “in Christ” language of v. 11. Eighth, Paul clearly taught elsewhere present union with the Lord in his resurrection life (cf. Eph 2:5-6).49

Thus there is good support for this second view. But, there are still problems. Perhaps the biggest objection is the use of “we believe” in v. 8. This seems to imply “hope” for a reality not yet in existence. Overall, then, it may be better to see Paul focusing on the present with a view to the future. In other words, both realities seem to be intended. It would appear, however, as was the case in 5:5, it was the present experience of salvation and the Spirit that led to the conclusion that hope does not disappoint. So also here. It is the present experience of Christ’s resurrection life that strengthens one in the belief that a future consummation is coming.

6:11 In connecting the thoughts of v. 10 with those of v. 11 Paul uses the conjunction so…too (οὕτως, houtōs). It appears that the death Christ died (v. 10) is both the model we are to follow as well as the ground or cause of our “considering ourselves” dead to sin. In other words, we are to consider ourselves dead to sin and alive to God in terms of following Christ’s example and we are able to consider ourselves dead to sin and alive to God since Christ, as our head, already died to sin and lives to God. The latter is based on the forensic connections between Christ and those related to him in 5:12-21.

The imperative consider (λογίζεσθε, logizesthe) means to “count something as true” or to “regard something as a certain way” (14:14). In this case the believer is exhorted to count himself dead to the power of sin and alive to God. Paul raised the question at the beginning of this paragraph, namely, “Are we to remain in sin so that grace may increase?” He answered it definitively in v. 2 with “Absolutely not!” But, in v. 2 he did not tell us how to remain free from the grip of sin. Here in v. 11 he does so. He says, in effect, “we remain free from sin by considering ourselves dead to it and alive to God.”

Two things need to be said about the idea of “considering,” or “reckoning” as some translations render it. First, the term has been used earlier on several occasions, the most pertinent being 3:28 and its occurrences in chapter 4. God “counted” Abraham’s faith as righteousness. He “reckons” or “considers” our faith as righteousness and now we must “consider ourselves,” in light of the work which God has done for us in our new head, Jesus Christ, dead to sin and alive to God. This requires faith. The implication is that the same way in which a person is justified, i.e., by faith, is the same way that a person is sanctified, i.e., by faith. 

The second comment is that the imperative “consider” is in the present tense which in this case involves an ongoing commitment to consider oneself dead to sin and alive to God. It is based on the indicative reality that we have already died with Christ and have been raised with him as our new head (6:3-5). This is something God did to us. We do not create this reality by obeying the command, but we do participate in it through considering ourselves appropriately. When we consider ourselves dead to the power, purposes, and impulses of sin, we participate in Christ’s death to sin and so become increasingly delivered from its downward pull (cf. 3:23).

At the same time as we consider ourselves dead to sin, we are to consider ourselves alive to God (ζῶντας δὲ τῷ θεῷ, zōntas de tō theō). “Alive to God” is not so much an ethical idea, though it certainly involves that (6:12-14). It is more foundationally a relational and spiritual reality. Whereas God was once unknown to the believer, he is now known and has become the object of his/her affections. These opposite “reckonings”—dead to sin, alive to God—exist for the believer in Christ (ἐν Χριστῷ  ᾿Ιησοῦ, en Christou Iēsou). God considered us “with Christ” when he died, was buried, and was raised. The forensic language is reminiscent of 5:12 where we were said to have participated in the sin of Adam. In any case, the present sphere in which we live out Christ’s death and resurrection (by considering it our own) is referred to as “in Christ.” The age of resurrection life and power has broken into the old age dominated by sin, judgment and condemnation. Death in Adam has given way to “life in Christ,” not only legally, but also practically, spiritually and ethically. Paul will spell this last point out in greater detail in the verses (and chapters) that follow.

6:12-13 Since Paul knows it is true that we are in fact dead to sin and alive to God, he therefore (οὐν, oun) advances the imperative that we are no longer to let sin reign in our mortal body (, mh oun basileuetw Je Jamartia en tw qnhtw Jumwn swmati). The apostle pictures sin here as a ruling master that must not be allowed to mount the throne and “call the shots,” as it were. He is a defeated king and must be kept down. If this is not done, he will assume a position of authority from which he will demand that we carry out his sinful desires and urges.

The sphere in which this defeated monarch will “live out” his sinful schemes, if allowed, is through our physical, mortal bodies. Therefore the sure way to ensure that this does not become a dominant reality is to freely and willingly present (, paristanete) our hands, head, and heart, to the Lord himself to be used in righteous causes and not to sin to be used for its ends, namely, unrighteousness.

6:14 Verse 14 rounds out the paragraph and gives the answer (which follows from vv. 2-11) to the initial question posed in v. 1. The for (γάρ, gar) which begins the verse links it closely with the preceding verses and indeed the question of the passage as a whole: “Should the Christian under grace continue to sin?” Answer: “No, because we were placed under grace in order that sin may no longer reign over us.”

While the overall sense of 6:14 in its context is clear, the two principle clauses which comprise the verse have given rise to many different interpretations, some of which have very little, if any, merit. What does Paul mean when he says, sin will have no mastery over you (ἁμαρτία γὰρ ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, hamartia gar humōn ou kurieusei)? Some commentators have argued, as a result of this passage, that the Christian will not sin, ever. But this is to miss the entire thrust of the question which began this paragraph (v. 1) and to seriously minimize the imperatives of vv. 12-13. Further, it suggests a theology not only foreign to Paul, but to the entire New Testament (cf. the Corinthian correspondence; Gal 5:16ff; cf. 1 John 1:9; 1 Peter 2:11-12).

Some scholars have suggested that the future tense “will have no mastery” functions as an imperative or command. They argue that Paul is commanding the Romans Christians not to allow sin to control them any longer. While the future tense can function in this way (i.e., to give what amounts to a command), and the immediate context in vv. 12-13 is hortatory in nature, it is still unlikely that this is Paul’s meaning here. If this were the case, one would expect a “therefore” (οὖν, oun) to begin v. 14 not a “for” (γάρ, gar). Paul is giving the reason Christians should not sin, not another command.

The best way to understand “will not have mastery” is in reference to the power of sin not dominating our present experience—an experience characterized as in between the time of the inauguration of salvation and the consummation of salvation (8:18). Therefore, it is at once a word of explanation, which posits the ultimate basis for our deliverance from sin, and a word of encouragement in the form of a promise.

The reason the promise is certain is because the Christian is no longer under the administration of the law (i.e., in Adam), but under grace (i.e., in Christ). That is, the fact that our old man has been crucified and Christians now live in union with Christ is referred to as a state of grace. The term law (νόμος, nomos), though without the article, refers to the Mosaic law as a whole, an administration.

F. Contribution of Passage to Systematic Theology

This passage contributes greatly to our understanding of sanctification and the object grounds upon which it proceeds, the relationship of our growth to the cross work of Christ and our responsibility in the matter.

Paul teaches that we do not need to sin and that indeed we ought not to sin because we have died to it through the death of Christ and our union with him. Also, in the same way, we are united with him in his resurrection and for that reason we can walk in newness of life—a life of love for God, expressed in keeping his commands (Rom 13:8-10) and a love for others expressed in civil obedience, encouragement, patience, and unity (Rom 12:1-15:13).

Thus, at the heart of progressive sanctification, that is, growth in holiness and Christlikeness, stands the cross work of Christ and its application to the believer who is reckoned by God to have participated in it. The responsibility of the believer is first off to reckon that they are indeed dead to sin and alive to God and then, in keeping with this, to present themselves to him and not sin as their new master. We would do well to think long and hard on the book of Romans before we run off into gimmicks to attempt to grow in the Christian life.


47 Stuart Briscoe, “Why Christ Had To Die,” Preaching Today 163, no. 4.

48 Douglas Moo, Romans 1-8, The Wycliffe Exegetical Commentary, ed. Kenneth Barker (Chicago: Moody, 1991), 391.

49 One should note the presence of the sun verbs in Ephesians 2:5-6 and the similarity between the ideas there and here in Romans 6. The vision in Ephesians 2:5-6 goes a step beyond Romans (though it may be inferred from it), however, when it pictures Christians seated with Christ in the heavenly realms.

What does Isaiah 45:3 mean, “I will give you the treasures of darkness”?

In the context, God is addressing Cyrus, the Persian King whom God calls his anointed. This is an appropriate title for the heathen king for two reasons: Cyrus, as a temporal deliverer of God’s people, and serves as an illustration of Jesus Christ, the eternal Redeemer; and because vassal rulers were anointed by their superior rulers, Cyrus, as one who carried out God’s purposes, could properly be said to be an anointed vassal. Like Jesus Christ, Cyrus’ mission was to deliver and to judge. On the night the Persians captured Babylon some of the men entered on the dry river bed and opened the gates to their armies from the inside.

In God’s purpose for Cyrus, He promised to clear the impediments to his progress and purpose (vs. 2). Then in verse 3, the promise is given that, as Israel’s God, the Lord would give Cyrus possession of the “Treasures of darkness.” This referred to the wealth of the vanquished pagan nations which was customarily concealed in subterranean vaults. Thus, they are called the treasure of darkness, i.e., treasures which came from darkness spiritually and literally. They were also called “the hidden riches of secret places (see Jer. 41:8; 50:37).

Related Topics: Bible Study Methods, Bibliology (The Written Word)

TTP Small Groups

Home bible studies (small groups) have quickly become one of the primary ways in which Christians find a great combination of fellowship and study of the Christian life during the week. They are a vital solution to most churches’ desire to create balance in their church life. The developers of The Theology Program have intentionally adapted the material in all seven courses to be used in such an environment. Whatever the make-up of your small group, TTP will add a much needed element of intellectual challenge through stimulating discussions that are both practical and penetrating.

Using TTP for small groups is easy...

 

 

How to start using TTP for your Small Group

Step One: Acquiring the needed material & equipment

Purchase a course leader’s guide, course set of DVDs, and the number of Student Theology Notebooks for the course of study. As our progression of courses suggests, it is highly recommended that you start with Introduction to Theology and then move on from there.

You will need a way of projecting or viewing the DVD teaching sessions. In a home setting you may be able to view the class through your DVD player hooked up to your TV. If the group is a little larger or it is difficult to provide good viewing for all the students, then you may consider using a projector system with a larger projection screen. This may be more practical in a church setting where this type of equipment may be more readily available and preferred for best viewing capability.

Step Two: Appointing a leader

Appoint a gifted leader who can be in charge of the administration of the program. This may be you! This leader is responsible for setting up the times and dates of meeting for the small group. As well, this leader will facilitate the discussion time, keeping the discussion on track. While he or she does not necessarily have to be one who is gifted in teaching, they must be ever mindful of the topics of discussion and ready to firmly guide the discussion in a fruitful manner. It is suggested that this leader have someone else who will co-lead with him or her. This will take some of the pressure off the individual leader and help to delegate some of the responsibilities on a week to week basis.


Step Three: Setting group requirements

There should not be more than 12 people invited to join the TTP small group. All people need to commit to all ten lessons of the course. If someone misses a meeting for some reason, they should commit watching the missed lesson on DVD or online at bible.org. This is vitally important since each lesson builds off the previous lessons and people can get lost very easily if they have missed any session(s).

The total time of the individual sessions should last no less than 2 hours each. The individual DVD lessons lasts about an hour and 15 minutes then there is 45 minutes to an hour of discussion time. This does not include time for dinner or fellowship before or after the TTP small group session. Some may want to have a short time for fellowship and dinner before the DVD begins. This would extend the entire small group time to a minimum of 3 hours. If time is an issue, you may want to watch the DVD session while eating dinner. Group obligations and requirements will differ. It is not suggested, however, that you extend the meeting to half a session each night. This would then extend the TTP small group to 20 weeks, which would be cumbersome. But, flexibility is often the key and the TTP small group can be successful even when these types of adjustments are necessary.

Step Four: Preparing to lead

Although not required, it is highly suggested that the leader(s) view all ten sessions of the course beforehand so that he or she understands the philosophy of the program and knows what to expect in the coming weeks. This will greatly help when facilitating discussion. At a bare minimum, the leader(s) should view the individual class session before the small group meets.

In the TTP Leader’s Notebook, there is a PowerPoint presentation of the entire course. The leader(s) can view each individual class presentation on PowerPoint in edit mode (the default mode of PowerPoint when it opens) while viewing the classes on DVD. In edit mode, there will be the leader’s notes in the notes section just below each slide. This is not necessarily needed for the small group leader(s) since there is a printed version of the PowerPoint slides included in the TTP Leader’s Notebook. Have your notebook open before you as you preview the course before your small group meets. Take note of the presentation notes and illustrations provided. You can use the extra space on the printouts to make additional notes that come to mind as you view the course. These notes can be used to help make the study more relevant to your context.

Step Five: Leading the discussion

After your small group has completed you are to discuss the “Group Discussion Questions” provided at the end of each lesson in the Student Theology Notebook. There are a couple of important things to keep in mind about these discussion questions. First, these were not created for people to do by themselves, but in community. In other words, the questions are not an assignment for people to complete sometime during the week and bring back completed, but questions that are only to be done in discussion in the community that has been brought together. This emphasizes the TTP value of doing theology in community, not in individualist isolation. Second, you should not expect to get through all the questions each session. These questions were created to stimulate theological discussion. Often times they are simply there to create discussion about one or two themes hitting them from many different angles. Therefore, the leader(s) should not be so concerned about getting through every question, but that the “spirit of the questions” are creating the desired interaction. This is why it is important that the leader(s) read through the individual questions before the small group meeting and highlight those which they think will be the most relevant to their people. You may only get through two or three of the questions—this is fine, so long as fruitful discussion pertaining to the subjects of the lesson are being discussed.

General Principles for TTP small group leaders:

Keep discussion on track!

Many times people will want to talk about every theological issue that they hold dearly or have had questions about during lesson that are not directly related to the topic. For example, someone may want to discuss the issue of predestination during the session on the Reformed tradition of the church in Introduction to Theology. This, however, as interesting and generally relevant as it is, would not be the place to discuss this issue. It will be covered in Soteriology. As well, someone may want to discuss the issue of the canon of Scripture (what books belong in the Bible) during the session on the Roman Catholic view of the Church in Ecclesiology and Eschatology. Again, as relevant as this is, it has already been covered in Bibliology and Hermeneutics. These off topic theological side-bars can eat of the 45 minutes of discussion in no time at all. And since each lesson is dependent upon the previous lesson, this could quickly become a problem.

Don’t pressure yourself to think you have to have all the answers. As is clear from the DVD teaching session, Michael and Rhome and the entire history of the Church has not been able to answer many theological questions with assurance, and neither can or should you. In other words, you are not necessarily there to answer the questions, but to engage in the discussion.

 

May God be with you in your pursuit of Him and may your group reflect the glory of His Son who loves you and gave Himself up for you.

3. The Historical Books of the New Testament

Introduction

As previously mentioned, the New Testament falls into three categories based on their literary makeup—the historical, the epistolary, and the prophetical. The four Gospels make up about 46 percent and the book of Acts raises this to 60 percent. This means 60 percent of the New Testament is directly historical tracing the roots and historical development of Christianity. Christianity is based on historical facts. This is inherent in the very nature of the gospel. Christianity is the message of the gospel and what is a gospel? It is good news, information derived from the witness of others. It is history, the testimony of historical facts. “The gospel is news that something has happened—something that puts a different face upon life. What that something is is told us in Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. It is the life and death and resurrection of Jesus Christ.”10 Following this four-fold account, Acts gives the historical account of the extension of the gospel message from Jerusalem, into Judea and Samaria, and to the farthest parts of the earth, into the Gentile world. It begins:

1:1 I wrote the former account (the Gospel of Luke), Theophilus, about all that Jesus began to do and teach 1:2 until the day he was taken up to heaven, after he had given orders by the Holy Spirit to the apostles he had chosen. 1:3 After his suffering he had also presented himself alive to these apostles by many convincing proofs. He was seen by them over a forty-day period and spoke about matters concerning the kingdom of God.

1:8 But you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come on you, and you will be my witnesses in Jerusalem, and in all Judea and Samaria, and to the farthest parts of the earth.

Luke is volume one and Acts is volume two of Dr. Luke’s treatise about the historical life and ministry of the Savior as begun by the Lord Jesus. This was continued by the Savior through the Holy Spirit working in the life of His apostles following Christ’s ascension into heaven. Acts thus provides the historical outline of the apostles’ ministry in the life of the early church. This becomes crucial to our understanding of much of what we have in the epistles, which were historical letters written to living people in historical places. The New Testament, then, is a historical book of the Good News of the living God at work in human history, not just in the past, but in the living present and the future in light of the promises of God.

The Synoptic Gospels

Before beginning a survey of each of the Gospels, it might be well to say a bit about the use of the term, The Synoptic Gospels. Though each Gospel has its distinct emphasis and purpose, the first three are sometimes referred to as the Synoptic Gospels because they “see together,” that is, they have the same point of view with regard to the life of Christ, agreeing in subject matter and order. Further, they also present the life of Christ in a way that complements the picture given in the Gospel of John. The following show a number of areas that are common to each of the first three Gospels:

  • The announcement of the Messiah by John the Baptist (Matt. 3, Mark 1, and Luke 3).
  • The baptism of Jesus (Matt. 3, Mark 1, and Luke 3).
  • The temptation of Jesus (Matt. 4, Mark 1, and Luke 4).
  • The teaching and miracles of Jesus (The major portion of each Gospel).
  • The transfiguration of Jesus (Matt. 17, Mark 9, and Luke 9).
  • The trial, death, and burial of Jesus (Matt. 26-27, Mark 14-15, Luke 22-23).
  • The resurrection of Jesus (Matt. 28, Mark 16, Luke 24).

The Purpose and Distinctive Focus of the Four Gospels

16:13 When Jesus came to the area of Caesarea Philippi, he asked his disciples, “Who do people say the Son of Man is?” 16:14 They answered, “Some say John the Baptist, others Elijah, and others Jeremiah or one of the prophets.” 16:15 He said to them, “And who do you say that I am?” 16:16 Simon Peter answered, “You are the Christ, the Son of the living God.”

Matthew 16:14 gives the four stock answers or schools of thought for a large number of people in Jesus’ day. Only a few at first, a believing remnant, recognized Him for who He really was, the Son of God. Thus, under the inspiration of the Spirit, the Gospel writers set about to reveal just who Jesus really was as to His person and work. In a four-fold way, each with their own distinctive focus, but in accounts that are complementary, the four Gospels answer the questions posed by the Lord to the disciples. They declare just exactly who Jesus is. They show Him to be the Messiah of Old Testament expectation, the Servant of the Lord, the Son of Man, the Son of God, and the one who is the Savior of the World. The Gospels give us God’s portrait of the person and work of Christ with four distinct pictures.

In Sidlow Baxter’s Explore the Book, he calls our attention to the interesting similarity between the vision in Ezekiel 1:10 and the Gospels, though he does not suggest the four living creatures were a type of the Gospels. He writes:

Most of us, perhaps, are familiar with the parallel which has often been noted between the four Gospels and the four “living creatures” in the opening vision of the prophet Ezekiel. The four “living creatures,” or cherubim, are thus described in Ezekiel 1:10: “As for the likeness of their faces, they four had the face of a man, and the face of a lion, on the right side; and they four had the face of an ox on the left side; they four also had the face of an eagle.” The lion symbolizes supreme strength, kingship; the man, highest intelligence; the ox, lowly service; the eagle, heavenliness, mystery, Divinity.

In Matthew we see the Messiah-King (the lion).
In Mark we see Jehovah’s Servant (the ox).
In Luke we see the Son of Man (the man).
In John we see the Son of God (the eagle).

It needs all four aspects to give the full truth. As Sovereign He comes to reign and rule. As Servant He comes to serve and suffer. As Son of man He comes to share and sympathise. As Son of God He comes to reveal and redeem. Wonderful fourfold blending—sovereignty and humility; humanity and deity!11

Matthew addresses his Gospel primarily to the Jews to convince them that Jesus of Nazareth is their Messiah, the King of the Jews. With the genealogy of Jesus, Matthew also uses ten fulfillment quotations by which he seeks to show that this Jesus, though rejected and crucified, is the long-awaited Messiah of the Old Testament (Matt. 1:23; 2:15; 2:18; 2:23; 4:15; 8:15; 12:18-21; 13:35; 21:5; 27:9-10). But though rejected by the nation as a whole and crucified, the King left an empty tomb.

Mark seems to be addressed to the Romans, a people of action but of few words, and presents Jesus as the Servant of the Lord who came “to give His life a ransom for many.” In keeping with this, Mark, the shortest of the Gospels, is vivid, active or lively, and presents a very clear eyewitness account, especially of the last week of Jesus’ life on earth. “A full 37 percent of this Gospel is devoted to the events of His last and most important week.”12

Luke, the doctor historian, presents Jesus as the perfect Son of Man who came “to seek and to save that which was lost” (Luke 19:10). Luke strongly stresses the true humanity of Christ while also declaring His deity. Some believe that Luke particularly had the Greeks in mind because of their keen interest in human philosophy.

John immediately (1:1-2) focuses the reader on the deity of Christ by presenting Jesus as the eternal Son of God who gives eternal and abundant life to all who would receive Him by believing in Him (John 1:12; 3:16-18, 36; 10:10). Though written to all mankind, John’s Gospel is especially written to the church. Five chapters record the farewell discourses of Jesus to His disciples to comfort them just a few hours before His death. In addition, seven miraculous signs of Jesus are set forth to demonstrate that Jesus is the Savior and to encourage people everywhere to believe in Him that they might have life (John 20:30-31).

Matthew

    Author and Title:

Each of the Gospels receives its name from the human author who wrote it. Though this first Gospel, as with each of the Gospels, never names its author, the universal testimony of the early church is that the apostle Matthew wrote it, and our earliest textual witnesses attribute it to him by giving it the title, “According to Matthew” (Kata Matthaion). Matthew, who was one of the original disciples of Jesus, was a Jew writing to Jews about the One who was their own Messiah. His original name was Levi, the son of Alphaeus. Matthew worked as a publican collecting taxes in Palestine for the Romans until he was called by the Lord to follow Him (Matt. 9:9, 10; Mark 2:14-15). His quick response may suggest his heart had already been stirred by the ministry of Jesus.

At an early date this gospel was given the title Kata Matthaion, “According to Matthew.” As this title suggests, other gospel accounts were known at that time (the word gospel was added later) …13

    Date: A.D. 50s or 60s

Suggestions for the dating of Matthew range from A.D. 40 to A.D. 140, but “the fact that the destruction of Jerusalem in A.D. 70 is viewed as an event yet future (24:2) seems to require an earlier date. Some feel that this was the first of the Gospels to be written (about A.D. 50), while others think it was not the first and that it was written in the 60s.”14

    Theme and Purpose:

As evident in the questions Jesus asked His disciples in 16:14f., Matthew wrote to Jews to answer their questions about Jesus of Nazareth. Jesus had plainly declared that He was their Messiah. Was He really the Old Testament Messiah predicted by the prophets? If so, why did the religious leaders fail to receive Him and why didn’t He establish the promised kingdom? Will it ever be established, and if so, when? Thus, Matthew is addressed primarily to a Jewish audience to show them that this Jesus is the long-awaited Messiah. This is seen in Jesus’ genealogy (1:1-17); the visit of the Magi (2:1-12); His entry into Jerusalem (21:5); the judgment of the nations (25:31-46); the often mentioning of the “kingdom of heaven” as is common with the other Gospels, and in the Old Testament fulfillment quotations mentioned previously.

    Key Words or Concept:

Jesus, the Messiah, the King of the Jews.

    Key Verses:

  • 1:20-23. But when he had considered this, behold, an angel of the Lord appeared to him in a dream, saying, “Joseph, son of David, do not be afraid to take Mary as your wife; for that which has been conceived in her is of the Holy Spirit. 21 And she will bear a Son; and you shall call His name Jesus, for it is He who will save His people from their sins.” 22 Now all this took place that what was spoken by the Lord through the prophet might be fulfilled, saying, 23 “BEHOLD, THE VIRGIN SHALL BE WITH CHILD, AND SHALL BEAR A SON, AND THEY SHALL CALL HIS NAME IMMANUEL,” which translated means, “GOD WITH US.”
  • 16:15-19. He said to them, “But who do you say that I am?” 16 And Simon Peter answered and said, “You are the Christ, the Son of the living God.” 17 And Jesus answered and said to him, “Blessed are you, Simon Barjona, because flesh and blood did not reveal this to you, but My Father who is in heaven. 18 And I also say to you that you are Peter, and upon this rock I will build My church; and the gates of Hades shall not overpower it. 19 I will give you the keys of the kingdom of heaven; and whatever you shall bind on earth shall be bound in heaven, and whatever you shall loose on earth shall be loosed in heaven.”
  • 28:18-20. And Jesus came up and spoke to them, saying, “All authority has been given to Me in heaven and on earth. 19 Go therefore and make disciples of all the nations, baptizing them in the name of the Father and the Son and the Holy Spirit, 20 teaching them to observe all that I commanded you; and lo, I am with you always, even to the end of the age.”

    Key Chapters:

  • Chapter 1 is key in that it introduces the genealogy and birth of Jesus as son of David, son of Abraham, and as one born by the miraculous work of the Spirit, with Joseph being the legal father by adoption, but not the physical father.
  • Chapter 12 is key because in this chapter we see the turning point when the religious leaders formally reject Jesus as their Messiah by attributing His miraculous power to Satan. At this point Jesus began to speak in parables to hide truth from the unresponsive. From this point on more time is given to His disciples.

    Christ as Seen in Matthew:

As previously stressed, Matthew’s goal is to demonstrate that Jesus is the Messiah of Old Testament expectation. He is the son of Abraham and David. Thus He is the King who comes offering the kingdom. The phrase “the king of heaven” occurs some thirty-two times in this Gospel. Further, to show that this Jesus fulfills expectations of the Old Testament, ten times he specifically stresses that what happened in the life of Jesus fulfills the Old Testament. Further, he uses more Old Testament quotations and allusions than any other book of the New Testament, some 130 times.

    Outline:

Matthew naturally falls into nine discernible sections:

    I.

    The Person and Presentation of the King (1:1-4:25)

    II.

    The Proclamation or Preaching of the King (5:1-7:29)

    III.

    The Power of the King (8:1-11:1)

    IV.

    The Program and Progressive Rejection of the King (11:2-16:12)

    V.

    The Pedagogy and Preparation of the King’s Disciples (16:13-20:28)

    VI.

    The Presentation of the King (20:29-23:39)

    VII.

    The Predictions or Prophecies of the King (24:1-25:46)

    VIII.

    The Passion or Rejection of the King (26:1-27:66)

    IX.

    The Proof of the King (28:1-20)

Mark

    Author and Title:

Mark’s Gospel is actually anonymous since it does not name its author. The Greek title, Kata Markon, “According to Mark” was added later by a scribe sometime before A.D. 125, but there is strong and clear evidence (external and internal) that Mark was its author. “The unanimous testimony of the early church fathers is that Mark, an associate of the apostle Peter, was the author.”15 In A.D. 112, Papias cited Mark as “the interpreter of Peter.” Dunnett points out, “A comparison of Peter’s sermon in Acts 10:36-43 with Mark’s Gospel shows the former to be an outline of the life of Jesus which Mark has given in much greater detail.”16

Though Mark was not one of the original disciples of Christ, he was the son of Mary, a woman of wealth and position in Jerusalem (Acts 12:12), a companion of Peter (1 Pet. 5:13), and the cousin of Barnabas (Col. 4:10). These associations, especially his association with Peter who was evidently Mark’s source of information, gave apostolic authority to Mark’s Gospel. Since Peter spoke of him as “Mark, my son,” (1 Pet. 5:13), Peter may have been the one who led Mark to Christ.

In addition, he was also a close associate of Paul. Ryrie writes:

He had the rare privilege of accompanying Paul and Barnabas on the first missionary journey but failed to stay with them through the entire trip. Because of this, Paul refused to take him on the second journey, so he went with Barnabas to Cyprus (Acts 15:38-40). About a dozen years later he was again with Paul (Col. 4:10; Philem. 24), and just before Paul’s execution he was sent for by the apostle (2 Tim. 4:11). His biography proves that one failure in life does not mean the end of usefulness.17

    Date: A.D. 50s or 60s

The dating of Mark is somewhat difficult, though many scholars believe this Gospel was the first of the four Gospels. Unless one rejects the element of predictive prophecy, 13:2 clearly shows that Mark was written before A.D. 70 and the destruction of the temple in Jerusalem. Ryrie points out:

In fact, if Acts must be dated about A.D. 61, and if Luke, the companion volume, preceded it, then Mark must be even earlier, since Luke apparently used Mark in writing his gospel. This points to a date in the 50s for Mark. However, many scholars believe that Mark was not written until after Peter died; i.e., after 67 but before 70.18

    Theme and Purpose:

The theme of Mark is ‘Christ the Servant.’ This thrust is brought in 10:45, “For even the Son of Man did not come to be served, but to serve, and give His life a ransom for many.” A careful reading of Mark shows how the two themes of this verse, service and sacrifice, are unfolded by Mark. Mark is addressed primarily to the Roman or Gentile reader. As a result, the genealogy of Jesus is omitted along with the Sermon on the Mount and the condemnations by the religious leaders receive less attention. Also, since Mark presents Jesus as the Worker, the Servant of the Lord, the book focuses on the activity of Christ as a faithful Servant effectively going about His work. This focus seems evident by Mark’s style as seen in his use of the Greek euqus, “immediately, at once,” or “then, so then,” which occurs some 42 times in this Gospel. Its meaning varies from the sense of immediacy as in 1:10, to that of logical order (“in due course, then”; cf. 1:21 [“when”]; 11:3 [“shortly”]).19 Another illustration of this active focus is Mark’s prominent use of the historic present to describe a past event, which was evidently done for vividness.

    Key Word:

Servant, Servant of the Lord.

    Key Verses:

  • 8:34-37. Then Jesus called the crowd with his disciples and said to them, “If anyone wants to come after me, he must deny himself and take up his cross and follow me. For whoever wants to save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for me and the gospel will save it. What advantage is it for someone to gain the whole world, yet forfeit his soul? What can a person give in exchange for his soul?”
  • 10:43-45. “But it is not this way among you. But whoever wants to be great among you must be your servant, and whoever wants to be first among you must be the slave of all. For even the Son of Man did not come to be served but to serve, and to give his life a ransom for many.”

    Key Chapters:

  • Chapter 8 forms a key chapter in Mark, much like chapter 12 in Matthew, because here there is a change in both the content and course of the ministry of Jesus. The pivotal event that brings about the change is the confession of Peter, “You are the Christ (the Messiah)” (8:29). This is followed immediately by a warning that they should tell no one, the revelation of His death, the call to discipleship, and the transfiguration.

That faith-inspired response triggers a new phase in both the content and the course of Jesus’ ministry. Until this point He has sought to validate His claims as Messiah. But now He begins to fortify His men for His forthcoming suffering and death at the hands of the religious leaders. Jesus’ steps begin to take Him daily closer to Jerusalem—the place where the Perfect Servant will demonstrate the full extent of His servanthood.20

    Christ as Seen in Mark:

Of course, Mark’s contribution especially centers on presenting the Savior as the Sacrificing Servant who gives His life obediently for the ransom of many. The focus is clearly on His ministry to the physical and spiritual needs of others always putting them before His own needs. This emphasis on the Savior’s servant activity is seen in the following:

Only eighteen out of Christ’s seventy parables are found in Mark—some of these are only one sentence in length—but he lists over half of Christ’s thirty-five miracles, the highest proportion in the Gospels.21

    Outline:

With the theme of the book being that of Christ the Servant. The key verse, 10:45, provides the key for two natural divisions of the Gospel: the Servant’s service (1:1-10:52) and the Servant’s sacrifice (11:1-16:20). We can divide this into five simple sections:

    I.

    The Preparation of the Servant for Service (1:1-13)

    II.

    The Preaching of the Servant in Galilee (1:14-9:50)

    III.

    The Preaching of the Servant in Perea (10:1-52)

    IV.

    The Passion of the Servant in Jerusalem (11:1-15:47)

    V.

    The Prosperity of the Servant in Resurrection (16:1-20)

Luke

    Author and Title:

Both Luke and Acts, which are addressed to Theophilus as a two-volume work, are attributed to Luke, and while Luke is nowhere named as the author of either, a great deal of evidence points to Luke, “the beloved physician” (Col. 4:14) as the author of both books. Significantly, these two books make up about 28 percent of the Greek New Testament. The only places where we find his name in the New Testament are Colossians 4:14; 2 Timothy 4:11; and Philemon 24. It is also believed that Luke referred to himself in the “we” sections of Acts (16:10-17; 20:5-21:18; 27:1-28:16). These “we” sections of Acts show that the author was a close associate and traveling companion of Paul. Since all but two of Paul’s associates are named in the third person, the list can be narrowed to Titus and Luke.

By process of elimination, Paul’s “dear friend Luke, the doctor” (Col 4:14), and “fellow worker” (Phm 24) becomes the most likely candidate. His authorship is supported by the uniform testimony of early Christian writings (e.g., the Muratorian Canon, A.D. 170, and the works of Irenaeus, c. 180).22

It seems evident from Colossians 4:10-14 that Luke was a Gentile for there Paul differentiates him from the Jews. Here the apostle states that, of his fellow-workers, Aristarchus, Mark, and Justus were the only ones who were Jews. This suggest that Epaphras, Luke, and Demas, also mentioned in these verses, were Gentiles, not Jews. “Luke’s obvious skill with the Greek language and his phrase “their own language” in Acts 1:19 also imply that he was not Jewish.”23

We know nothing about his early life or conversion except that he was not an eyewitness of the life of Jesus Christ (Luke 1:2). Though a physician by profession, he was primarily an evangelist, writing this gospel and the book of Acts and accompanying Paul in missionary work … He was with Paul at the time of the apostle’s martyrdom (2 Tim. 4:11), but of his later life we have no certain facts.24

    Date: A.D. 60

Two commonly suggested periods for dating the Gospel of Luke are: (1) A.D. 59-63, and (2) the 70s or the 80s, but the conclusion of Acts shows us that Paul was in Rome, and since Luke is the former treatise, written before Acts (Acts 1:1), the Gospel of Luke must have been written in the earlier period, around A.D. 60. However, suggesting that Luke’s Gospel received its final form in Greece and not in Rome, some have suggested A.D. 70.

    Theme and Purpose:

The purpose of Luke is clearly stated in the prologue of his Gospel.

1:1-4 Now many have undertaken to compile an account of the events that have been fulfilled among us, 1:2 like the accounts passed on to us by those who were eyewitnesses and servants of the word from the beginning. 1:3 So it seemed good to me as well, because I have followed all things carefully from the beginning, to write an orderly account for you, most excellent Theophilus, 1:4 so that you may have certainty regarding the things you were taught.

Several things need to be noticed regarding his approach to presenting the gospel:

Luke states that his own work was stimulated by the work of others (1:1), that he consulted eyewitnesses (1:2), and that he sifted and arranged the information (1:3) under the guidance of the Holy Spirit to instruct Theophilus in the historical reliability of the faith (1:4). This is a carefully researched and documented writing.25

As a Gentile, Luke must have felt responsible to write his two-volume account of the life of Christ so it would be available to Gentile readers. This seems evident from the fact that Luke “translates Aramaic terms with Greek words and explains Jewish customs and geography to make his Gospel more intelligible to his original Greek readership.”26

Luke, written by the “the beloved physician,” is the most comprehensive and longest of the Gospels. It presents the Savior as the Son of Man, the Perfect Man who came to seek and save the lost (19:10). In Matthew we see Jesus as Son of David, Israel’s King; in Mark we see Him as the Lord’s Servant, serving others; in Luke we see Him as the Son of Man, meeting man’s needs, a perfect man among men, chosen from men, tested among men, and supremely qualified to be the Savior and High Priest. In Matthew we see groupings of significant events, in Mark we see the snapshots of significant events, but in Luke we see more details of these events by the physician/historian.

His perfect human nature as the Son of Man, yet also Son of God, is brought out by the following:

    1. His physical birth with his genealogy traced all the way back to Adam (3:38) (Matthew goes back only to Abraham).

    2. His mental development is stressed in 2:40-52.

    3. His moral and spiritual perfection is also stressed as evidenced at His baptism by the voice of the Father from heaven and by the anointing of the Holy Spirit.

So in Jesus we have One who is perfect manhood—physically, mentally, and spiritually.

    Key Word:

Jesus, the Son of Man.

    Key Verses:

  • 1:1-4 Now many have undertaken to compile an account of the events that have been fulfilled among us, 1:2 like the accounts passed on to us by those who were eyewitnesses and servants of the word from the beginning. 1:3 So it seemed good to me as well, because I have followed all things carefully from the beginning, to write an orderly account for you, most excellent Theophilus, 1:4 so that you may have certainty regarding the things you were taught.
  • 19:10 For the Son of Man came to seek and to save the lost.

    Key Chapters:

Chapter 15. In view of the theme stressed in 19:10, the emphasis on ‘seeking’ in the three parables of chapter 15 (the lost sheep, the lost coin, and the lost son) makes this a key chapter in Luke’s Gospel.

    Christ as Seen in Luke:

The humanity and compassion of Jesus are repeatedly stressed in Luke’s Gospel. Luke gives the most complete account of Christ’s ancestry, birth, and development. He is the ideal Son of Man who identified with the sorrow and plight of sinful man in order to carry our sorrows and offer us the priceless gift of salvation. Jesus alone fulfills the Greek ideal of human perfection.27

    Outline:

    I.

    The Prologue: The Method and Purpose of Writing (1:1-4)

    II.

    The Identification of the Son of Man with Men (1:1-4:13)

    III.

    The Ministry of the Son of Man to Men (4:14-9:50)

    IV.

    The Rejection of the Son of Man by Men (9:51-19:44)

    V.

    The Suffering of the Son of Man for Men (19:45-23:56)

    VI.

    The Authentication (by resurrection) of the Son of Man Before Men (24:1-53)

John

    Author and Title:

From early in the second century, church tradition has attributed the fourth Gospel to John the apostle, son of Zebedee and brother of James. Jesus named John and James, “Sons of Thunder” (Mark 3:17). Salome, his mother, served Jesus in Galilee and was present at His crucifixion (Mark 15:40-41). He was not only close to Jesus as one of the Twelve, but he is usually identified as “the beloved disciple” (13:23; 18:15, 16; 19:26-27), was one of the inner circle and one of three Christ took with Him to the Mount of Transfiguration (Matt. 17:1). He was also closely associated with Peter. After the ascension of Christ, John became one whom Paul identified as the “pillars” of the church (Gal. 2:9).

In the strict sense of the term, the fourth Gospel is anonymous. No name of its author is given in the text. This is not surprising because a gospel differs in literary form from an epistle (letter). The letters of Paul each begin with his name, which was the normal custom of letter writers in the ancient world. None of the human authors of the four Gospels identified himself by name. But that does not mean one cannot know who the authors were. An author may indirectly reveal himself within the writing, or his work may be well known in tradition as coming from him.

Internal evidence supplies the following chain of connections regarding the author of the Fourth Gospel. (1) In John 21:24 the word “them” refers to the whole Gospel, not to just the last chapter. (2) “The disciple” in 21:24 was “the disciple whom Jesus loved” (21:7). (3) From 21:7 it is certain that the disciple whom Jesus loved was one of seven persons mentioned in 21:2 (Simon Peter, Thomas, Nathanael, the two sons of Zebedee, and two unnamed disciples). (4) “The disciple whom Jesus loved” was seated next to the Lord at the Last Supper, and Peter motioned to him (13:23-24). (5) He must have been one of the Twelve since only they were with the Lord at the Last Supper (cf. Mark 14:17; Luke 22:14). (6) In the Gospel, John was closely related to Peter and thus appears to be one of the inner three (cf. John 20:2-10; Mark 5:37-38; 9:2-3; 14:33). Since James, John’s brother, died in the year A.D. 44, he was not the author (Acts 12:2). (7) “The other disciple” (John 18:15-16) seems to refer to the “disciple whom Jesus loved” since he is called this in 20:2. (8) The “disciple whom Jesus loved” was at the cross (19:26), and 19:35 seems to refer to him. (9) The author’s claim, “We have seen His glory” (1:14), was the claim of someone who was an eyewitness (cf. 1 John 1:1-4).

Putting all of these facts together makes a good case for the author of the Fourth Gospel having been John, one of the sons of a fisherman named Zebedee.28

    Date: A.D. 85-90

Some critics have sought to place the dating of John well into the second century (about A.D. 150), but a number of factors have proven this false.

Archeological finds supporting the authenticity of the text of John (e.g., John 4:11; 5:2-3), word studies (e.g., synchrontai, 4:9), manuscript discoveries (e.g., P52), and the Dead Sea Scrolls have given powerful support to an early dating for John. So it is common today to find nonconservative scholars arguing for a date as early as A.D. 45-66. An early date is possible. But this Gospel has been known in the church as the “Fourth” one, and the early church fathers believed that it was written when John was an old man. Therefore a date between 85 and 95 is best. John 21:18, 23 require the passing of some time, with Peter becoming old and John outliving him.29

    Theme and Purpose:

Probably more than any other book of the Bible, John clearly states the theme and purpose of his Gospel. Significantly, this statement of purpose follows Thomas’ encounter with the resurrected Savior. If you recall, Thomas had doubted the reality of the resurrection (John 20:24-25). Immediately after this the Lord appeared to the disciples and addressed Thomas with these words, “Put your finger here, and examine my hands. Extend your hand and put it into my side. Do not continue in your unbelief, but believe.” Thomas then declared, “My Lord and my God!” The Lord then said to Thomas, “Have you believed because you have seen me? Blessed are the people who have not seen and yet have believed.” It is following this exchange and the focus on the need of believing in Jesus that John gives us the theme and statement of purpose:

20:30 Now Jesus performed many other miraculous signs in the presence of his disciples that are not recorded in this book. 20:31 But these are recorded so that you may believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that by believing you may have life in his name.

In keeping with this statement of purpose, John selected seven sign-miracles to reveal the person and mission of Christ that it might bring people to believe in Jesus as Savior. The term used of these miracles is shmeion, “a sign, a distinguishing mark,” and then “a sign consisting of a miracle, a wonder, something contrary to nature.” John always refers to Jesus’ miracles by this term because shmeion emphasized the significance of the action rather than the miracle (see, e.g., 4:54; 6:14; 9:16; 11:47). These signs revealed Jesus’ glory (see 1:14; cf. Isa 35:1-2; Joel 3:18; Am 9:13). These seven signs consisted of the following: (1) the turning of water into wine (2:1-11); (2) the cure of the nobleman’s son (4:46-54); (3) the cure of the paralytic (5:1-18); (4) the feeding of the multitude (6:6-13); (5) the walking on the water (6:16-21); (6) the giving of sight to the blind (9:1-7); and (7) the raising of Lazarus (11:1-45).

John’s special theme and purpose is also easily discerned by the distinctive nature of his Gospel when compared to Matthew, Mark, and Luke.

When one compares the Gospel of John with the other three Gospels, he is struck by the distinctiveness of John’s presentation. John does not include Jesus’ genealogy, birth, baptism, temptation, casting out of demons, parables, transfiguration, instituting of the Lord’s Supper, His agony in Gethsemane, or His Ascension. John’s presentation of Jesus stresses His ministry in Jerusalem, the feasts of the Jewish nation, Jesus’ contacts with individuals in private conversations (e.g., chaps. 3-4; 18:28-19:16), and His ministry to His disciples (chaps. 13-17). The major body of the Gospel is contained in a “Book of Signs” (2:1-12:50) which embraces seven miracles or “signs” which proclaim Jesus as the Messiah, the Son of God. This “Book of Signs” also contains great discourses of Jesus which explain and proclaim the significance of the signs. For example, following the feeding of the 5,000 (6:1-15), Jesus revealed Himself as the Bread of Life which the heavenly Father gives for the life of the world (6:25-35). Another notable and exclusive feature of the Fourth Gospel is the series of “I am” statements that were made by Jesus (cf. 6:35; 8:12; 10:7, 9, 11, 14; 11:25; 14:6; 15:1, 5).

The distinctiveness of this Gospel must be kept in perspective. The Gospels were not intended as biographies. Each Gospel writer selected from a much larger pool of information the material which would serve his purpose. It has been estimated that if all the words from the lips of Jesus cited in Matthew, Mark, and Luke were read aloud, the amount of time taken would be only about three hours …30

    Key Words:

The key concept in John is Jesus, the Son of God, the one who is the Logos, the very revelation of God (John 1:1, 14, 18). But there are a number of other key words in the presentation of Christ like truth, light, darkness, word, knowledge, believe, abide, love, world, witness, and judgment. The verb believe (Greek, pisteuw) occurs 98 times in this Gospel. The noun, “faith” (Greek, pistis) does not occur.

    Key Verses:

  • 1:11-13. He came to what was his own, but his own people did not receive him. But to all who have received him—those who believe in his name—he has given the right to become God’s children—children not born by human parents or by human desire or a husband’s decision, but by God.
  • 1:14. Now the Word became flesh and took up residence among us. We saw his glory—the glory of the one and only full of grace and truth, who came from the Father.
  • 3:16. For this is the way God loved the world: he gave his one and only Son that everyone who believes in him should not perish but have eternal life.
  • 20:30-31. Now Jesus performed many other miraculous signs in the presence of his disciples that are not recorded in this book. But these are recorded so that you may believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that by believing you may have life in his name.

    Key Chapters:

  • It is difficult to choose a key chapter in John’s Gospel, but surely the Lord’s conversation with Nicodemus in chapter 3 rates as one of the key chapters. John 3:16 is perhaps quoted more than any other verse in the Bible. Also important in this chapter are the words of the Savior regarding the need to be born again or from above (see 3:3-6).
  • Other key chapters are John 4, the encounter with the woman at the well, the discourses with the disciples preparing them for His absence, John 13-16, and the Lord’s prayer to the Father in John 17.

    Christ as Seen in John:

While the deity of Christ is a prominent theme in the Bible in many places, there is no book that presents a more powerful case for the deity of Jesus as the incarnate Son of God than does this Gospel. The fact is that one who is identified as “The man called Jesus” (9:11) is also called “God, the One and Only” (1:18 NIV), “Christ, the Son of the Living God” (6:69 KJV) or “the Holy One of God” (6:69 NIV, NASB, NET).

This declaration of the deity of Jesus Christ is further developed by seven “I AM” statements made by Jesus and recorded in John’s Gospel. These seven statements are: I am the bread of life (6:35), I am the light of the world (8:12), I am the gate (10:7, 9), I am the good shepherd (10:11, 14), I am the resurrection and the life (11:25), I am the way, the truth, and the life (14:6), I am the true vine (15:1, 5).

Another distinctive of John’s Gospel, again focusing on the person of Christ, are the five witnesses that witness to Jesus as the Son of God. In John 5:31f., Jesus is responding to the arguments of His opponents. They were claiming that His witness was without other witnesses to corroborate His testimony, but Jesus shows that is not true and proceeds to remind them that there are other witnesses to the validity of His claims: there is His Father (vv. 32, 37), there is John the Baptist (v. 33), His miracles (v. 36), the Scriptures (v. 39), and Moses (v. 46). Later, in 8:14 He declares that His witness is indeed true.

… On certain occasions, Jesus equates Himself with the Old Testament “I AM,” or Yahweh (see 4:25-26; 8:24, 28, 58; 13:19; 18:5-6, 8). Some of the most crucial affirmations of His deity are found here (1:1; 8:58; 10:30; 14:9; 20:28).31

    Outline:

    I. The Prologue: The Incarnation of the Son of God (1:1-18)

      A. The Deity of Christ (1:1-2)

      B. The Preincarnate Work of Christ (1:3-5)

      C. The Forerunner of Christ (1:6-8)

      D. The Rejection of Christ (1:9-11)

      E. The Acceptance of Christ (1:12-13)

      F. The Incarnation of Christ (1:14-18)

    II. The Presentation of the Son of God (1:19-4:54)

      A. By John the Baptist (1:19-34)

      B. To John’s Disciples (1:35-51)

      C. At the Wedding in Cana (2:1-11)

      D. At the Temple in Jerusalem (2:12-25)

      E. To Nicodemus (3:1-21)

      F. By John the Baptist (3:22-36)

      G. To the Samaritan Woman (4:1-42)

      H. To an Official of Capernaum (4:43-54)

    III. The Opposition to the Son of God (5:1-12:50)

      A. At the Feast in Jerusalem (5:1-47)

      B. During the Time of the Passover in Galilee (6:1-71)

      C. At the Feast of Tabernacles in Jerusalem (7:1-10:21)

      D. At the Feast of Dedication in Jerusalem (10:22-42)

      E. At Bethany (11:1-12:11)

      F. At Jerusalem (12:12-50)

    IV. The Instruction by the Son of God (13:1-16:33)

      A. Concerning Forgiveness (13:1-20)

      B. Concerning His Betrayal (13:21-30)

      C. Concerning His Departure (13:31-38)

      D. Concerning Heaven (14:1-14)

      E. Concerning the Holy Spirit (14:15-26)

      F. Concerning Peace (14:27-31)

      G. Concerning Fruitfulness (15:1-17)

      H. Concerning the World (15:18-16:6)

      I. Concerning the Holy Spirit (16:7-15)

      J. Concerning His Return (16:16-33)

    V. The Intercession of the Son of God (17:1-26)

    VI. The Crucifixion of the Son of God (18:1-19:42)

    VII. The Resurrection of the Son of God (20:1-31)

      A. The Empty Tomb (20:1-9)

      B. The Appearances of the Risen Lord (20:10-31)

    VIII. The Epilogue: The Appearance by the Lake (21:1-25)

      A. The Appearance to the Seven Disciples (21:1-14)

      B. The Words to Peter (21:15-23)

      C. The Conclusion of the Gospel (21:24-25)

Acts

    Author and Title:

Although the author is unnamed in Acts, the evidence leads to the conclusion that the author was Luke. As previously mentioned, Acts is the second volume of a two-part treatise written by Luke, the physician, to Theophilus about “all that Jesus began to do and teach.” In support of Luke as the author, Ryrie writes:

That the author of Acts was a companion of Paul is clear from the passages in the book in which “we” and “us” are used (16:10-17; 20:5-21:18; 27:1-28:16). These sections themselves eliminate known companions of Paul other than Luke, and Colossians 4:14 and Philemon 24 point affirmatively to Luke, who was a physician. The frequent use of medical terms also substantiates this conclusion (1:3; 3:7ff.; 9:18, 33; 13:11; 28:1-10). Luke answered the Macedonian call with Paul, was in charge of the work at Philippi for about six years, and later was with Paul in Rome during the time of Paul’s house arrest. It was probably during this last period that the book was written. If it were written later it would be very difficult to explain the absence of mentioning such momentous events as the burning of Rome, the martyrdom of Paul, or the destruction of Jerusalem.32

Regarding the title, all available Greek manuscripts designate it by the title Praxeis, “Acts,” or by the title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Just how or why it received this title is uncertain. Actually, “The Acts of the Apostles” is perhaps not the most accurate title since it does not contain the acts of all the apostles. Only Peter and Paul are really emphasized, though the promise of the coming of the Spirit was made to all the apostles in Acts 1:2-8 who were then to go into all the world preaching the gospel in the power of the Spirit (however, see 4:32). Many have felt that the book would be more accurately titled, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit” since it describes the spread of Christianity from the time of the coming of the Spirit in Acts 2 as promised in Acts 1:8.

    Date: A.D. 61

The issues regarding the dating of the book are summarized by Stanley Toussaint as follows:

The writing of Acts must have taken place before the destruction of Jerusalem in A.D. 70. Certainly an event of such magnitude would not have been ignored. This is especially true in light of one of the basic themes of the book: God’s turning to the Gentiles from the Jews because of the Jews’ rejection of Jesus Christ.

Luke scarcely would have omitted an account of Paul’s death, traditionally dated from A.D. 66-68, if it had occurred before he wrote Acts.

Nor did Luke mention the Neronian persecutions which began after the great fire of Rome in A.D. 64.

Furthermore, a defense of Christianity before Nero by using the Book of Acts to appeal to what lower officials had ruled regarding Paul would have had little point at the time of the Neronian antagonism. At that time Nero was so intent on destroying the church, the defense set forth in Acts would have had little effect in dissuading him.

The date usually accepted by conservative scholars for the writing of Acts is around A.D. 60-62. Accordingly the place of writing would be Rome or possibly both Caesarea and Rome. At the time of writing, Paul’s release was either imminent or had just taken place.33

    Theme and Purpose:

The book of Acts stands out as unique among the New Testament books for it alone provides a bridge for the other books of the New Testament. As Luke’s second treatise, Acts continues what Jesus “began to do and to teach” (1:1) as recorded in the Gospels. It begins with Christ’s Ascension and continues to the period of the New Testament Epistles. In it we have the continuation of the ministry of Jesus Christ through the Holy Spirit at work in the apostles who went forth preaching and establishing the church, the body of Christ. Acts is the historical link between the Gospels and the Epistles.

Not only does it make this bridge for us, but it provides an account of the life of Paul and gives us the historical occasion for his letters. In the process, Acts recounts the first 30 years of the life of the church.

After summarizing various views on the purpose of Acts, Toussaint writes:

The purpose of the Book of Acts may be stated as follows: To explain with the Gospel of Luke the orderly and sovereignly directed progress of the kingdom message from Jews to Gentiles, and from Jerusalem to Rome. In Luke’s Gospel the question is answered, “If Christianity has its roots in the Old Testament and in Judaism, how did it become a worldwide religion?” The Book of Acts continues in the vein of the Gospel of Luke to answer the same problem.34

Acts 1:8 expresses the theme of Acts—the indwelling Holy Spirit empowering God’s people to be the Savior’s witnesses both in Jerusalem (home base), and in all Judea and Samaria (the immediate and surrounding areas), and even to the remotest part of the earth (the world).

    Key Word:

  • The key concept for Acts would be the growth of the Church in all the world.
  • Two key words are “witness” or “witnesses,” and “the Holy Spirit.”

    Key Verses:

  • 1:8 “But you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come on you, and you will be my witnesses in Jerusalem, and in all Judea and Samaria, and to the farthest parts of the earth.”
  • 2:42-47 They were devoting themselves to the apostles’ teaching and to fellowship, to the breaking of bread and to prayers. 2:43 Reverential awe came on everyone, and many wonders and miraculous signs came about by the apostles. 2:44 All who believed were together and held everything in common, 2:45 and they began selling their property and possessions and distributing the proceeds to everyone, as anyone had need. 2:46 Every day they continued to gather together by common consent in the temple courts, breaking bread from house to house, sharing their food with glad and humble hearts, 2:47 praising God and having the good will of all the people. And the Lord was adding to their number every day those who were being saved.

    Key Chapters:

  • Since the accomplishment of the church’s global mission of worldwide outreach is dependent on the coming of the Holy Spirit, chapter 2 is naturally the key chapter. This chapter records the fulfillment of 1:8 on the Day of Pentecost when the Holy Spirit came and began His ministry of baptizing believers into Christ’s body, the church (cf. 1:5; 11:15-16 with 1 Cor. 12:13), began indwelling all believers and empowering them to be witnesses of the Savior.

    Key People:

Key people include: Peter, Stephen, Philip, James, Barnabas and Paul.

    Christ as Seen in Acts:

The resurrected Savior is the central theme of the sermons and defenses in Acts. The Old Testament Scriptures, the historical resurrection, the apostolic testimony, and the convicting power of the Holy Spirit all bear witness that Jesus is both Lord and Christ (see Peter’s sermons in 2:22-36; 10:34-43). “To Him all the prophets witness that, through His name, whoever believes in Him will receive remission of sins” (10:43). “Nor is there salvation in any other, for there is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (4:12).35

    Outline:

Acts can be naturally outlined around Acts 1:8, the spread of the gospel from Jerusalem to Judea and Samaria, and to the uttermost part of the earth.36

    I. The Witness in Jerusalem (1:1-6:7)

      A. The Expectation of the Chosen (1:1-2:47) Progress report no. 1: “And the Lord added to their number daily those who were being saved” (2:47).

      B. The Expansion of the Church in Jerusalem (3:1-6:7) Progress report no. 2: “So the Word of God spread. The number of disciples in Jerusalem increased rapidly” (6:7).

    II. The Witness in all Judea and Samaria (6:8-9:31)

      A. The Martyrdom of Stephen (6:8-8:1a)

        1. The Arrest of Stephen (6:8-7:1)

        2. The Address of Stephen (7:2-53)

        3. The Attack on Stephen (7:54-8:1a)

      B. The Ministry of Philip (8:1b-40)

      C. The Message of Saul (9:1-19a)

      D. The Conflicts of Saul (9:19b-31) Progress report no. 3: “Then the church throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria … was strengthened; and [it was] encouraged by the Holy Spirit, it grew in numbers, living in the fear of the Lord” (9:31).

    III. The Witness to the Extremity of the Earth (9:32-28:31)

      A. The Extension of the Church to Antioch (9:32-12:24) Progress report no. 4: “But the Word of God continued to increase and spread” (12:24).

      B. The Extension of the Church in Asia Minor (12:25-16:5) Progress report no. 5: “So the churches were strengthened in the faith and grew daily in numbers” (16:5).

      C. The Extension of the Church in the Aegean Area (16:6-19:20) Progress report no. 6: “In this way the Word of the Lord spread widely and grew in power” (19:20).

      D. The Extension of the Church to Rome (19:21-28:31) Progress report no. 7: “Paul … welcomed all who came to see him. Boldly and without hindrance he preached the kingdom of God and taught about the Lord Jesus Christ” (28:30-31).


10 Machen, p. 17.

11 J. Sidlow Baxter, Explore The Book, A Basic and Broadly Interpretative Course of Bible Study From Genesis to Revelation, Vol. 5, Inter-Testament and the Gospels, Zondervan, Grand Rapids, 1960, p. 120.

12 Bruce Wilkinson and Kenneth Boa, Talk Thru The Bible, Thomas Nelson, Nashville, 1983, p. 305.

13 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 308.

14 Charles Caldwell Ryrie, Ryrie Study Bible, Expanded Edition, Moody, p. 1509.

15 John F. Walvoord, Roy B. Zuck, editors, The Bible Knowledge Commentary, Victor Books, Wheaton, 1983,1985, electronic media.

16 Walter M. Dunnett, Professor of New Testament, Moody Bible Institute, New Testament Survey, Evangelical Teacher Training Association, Wheaton, 1967, p. 17.

17 Ryrie, p. 1574.

18 Ryrie, p. 1574.

19 Walvoord/Zuck, electronic media.

20 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 320.

21 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 321.

22 The NIV Study Bible Notes, Zondervan NIV Bible Library, Zondervan, Grand Rapids, 1985, electronic edition.

23 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 327.

24 Ryrie, p. 1614.

25 Ryrie, p. 1614.

26 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 328.

27 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 328.

28 Walvoord/Zuck, electronic media.

29 Walvoord/Zuck, electronic media.

30 Walvoord/Zuck, electronic media.

31 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 338.

32 Ryrie, p. 1724.

33 Walvoord/Zuck, electronic media.

34 Walvoord/Zuck, electronic media.

35 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 353.

36 The outline used here follows that of Dr. Stanley in the Bible Knowledge Commentary, edited by Walvoord and Zuck, electronic media.

Related Topics: Canon, Introductions, Arguments, Outlines

3. Os Livros Históricos do Novo Testamento

Related Media

Introdução

Conforme previamente mencionado, o Novo Testamento é dividido em três categorias, com base na sua composição literária – histórica, epistolar e profética. Os quatro Evangelhos compõem cerca de 46 por cento, e o livro dos Actos eleva esta percentagem para 60 por cento. Isto significa que 60 por cento do Novo Testamento é directamente histórico, delineando as raízes e desenvolvimento histórico da Cristandade. O Cristianismo baseia-se em factos históricos. Tal é inerente à própria estrutura do Evangelho. O Cristianismo é a mensagem do Evangelho, e o que é um evangelho? É a boa nova, informação que deriva do testemunho de outros. É história, o testemunho de factos históricos. “O Evangelho é a notícia de que algo aconteceu – algo que confere à vida uma faceta diferente. O que esse 'algo' representa é-nos explicado em Mateus, Marcos, Lucas e João. É a vida, morte e ressurreição de Jesus Cristo.”1 Seguindo-se a este registo quádruplo, Actos concede-nos o registo histórico da disseminação da mensagem evangélica desde Jerusalém até à Judeia, Samaria e regiões mais longínquas da Terra, até ao mundo Gentio. Começa assim:

1:1 Escrevi o primeiro livro, ó Teófilo, relatando todas as coisas que Jesus começou a fazer e a ensinar 1:2 até ao dia em que, depois de haver dado mandamentos por intermédio do Espírito Santo aos apóstolos que escolhera, foi elevado às alturas. 1:3 A estes também, depois de ter padecido, se apresentou vivo, com muitas provas incontestáveis, aparecendo-lhes durante quarenta dias e falando das coisas concernentes ao reino de Deus.

1:8 Mas recebereis poder, ao descer sobre vós o Espírito Santo, e sereis minhas testemunhas tanto em Jerusalém como em toda a Judeia e Samaria e até aos confins da terra.

Lucas é o primeiro, e Actos o segundo volume do tratado do Dr. Lucas acerca da vida histórica e ministério do Salvador, conforme iniciado pelo Senhor Jesus. Tal foi continuado pelo Salvador através do Espírito Santo, em actuação na vida dos Seus apóstolos, após a ascensão de Cristo ao Céu. Assim, Actos providencia o esboço histórico do ministério dos apóstolos na vida da Igreja primitiva. Isto torna-se crucial para a nossa compreensão de muita coisa que encontramos nas epístolas, cartas históricas redigidas para pessoas que viviam em locais históricos. Portanto, o Novo Testamento é um livro histórico das Boas Novas do Deus vivo que actua na história humana, não só passada, mas também no presente e futuro, à luz das Suas promessas.

Os Evangelhos Sinópticos

Antes de se iniciar uma análise de cada um dos Evangelhos, será útil falar um pouco sobre o uso do termo Evangelhos Sinópticos. Embora cada Evangelho tenha a sua ênfase e propósito distintos, por vezes os primeiros três são denominados de Evangelhos Sinópticos, porque “vêem juntos”, isto é, têm o mesmo ponto de vista a respeito da vida de Cristo, concordando em matéria de sujeito e ordem. Para além disso, também apresentam a vida de Cristo de uma forma que complementa a imagem dada no Evangelho de João. O que se segue põe em evidência um conjunto de áreas comuns a cada um dos primeiros três Evangelhos:

  • O anúncio do Messias por João Baptista (Mt. 3, Mc. 1 e Lc. 3).
  • O baptismo de Jesus (Mt. 3, Mc. 1 e Lc. 3).
  • A tentação de Jesus (Mt. 4, Mc. 1 e Lc. 4).
  • Os ensinamentos e milagres de Jesus (porção principal de cada Evangelho).
  • A transfiguração de Jesus (Mt. 17, Mc. 9 e Lc. 9).
  • A provação, morte e sepultamento de Jesus (Mt. 26-27, Mc. 14-15, Lc. 22-23).
  • A ressurreição de Jesus (Mt. 28, Mc. 16 e Lc. 24).

O Propósito e Foco Distinto dos Quatro Evangelhos

16:13 E, chegando Jesus às partes de Cesareia de Filipe, interrogou os seus discípulos, dizendo: Quem dizem os homens ser o Filho do homem? 16:14 E eles disseram: Uns, João Batista; outros Elias, e outros Jeremias, ou um dos profetas. 16:15 Disse-lhes ele: E vós, quem dizeis que eu sou? 16:16 E Simão Pedro, respondendo, disse: Tu és o Cristo, o Filho do Deus vivo.

Mateus 16:14 providencia as quatro respostas clássicas ou escolas de pensamento de um grande número de pessoas no tempo de Jesus. No início, apenas algumas – um remanescente crente – O reconheceram por aquilo que Ele realmente era, o Filho de Deus. Assim, sob inspiração do Espírito, os escritores evangelistas começaram a revelar quem Jesus era realmente, quanto à Sua pessoa e obra. De uma forma quádrupla, cada um com a sua ênfase distinta, mas em registos que se complementam, os quatro Evangelhos respondem às questões formuladas pelo Senhor aos Seus discípulos. Declaram quem Jesus É exactamente. Mostram ser Ele o Messias da expectativa do Antigo Testamento, o Servo do Senhor, o Filho do Homem, o Filho de Deus e aquele que é o Salvador do Mundo. Os Evangelhos concedem-nos o retrato de Deus da pessoa e obra de Cristo, mediante quatro imagens distintas.

No livro de Sidlow Baxter, Explore the Book (Examinai as Escrituras), o autor chama a nossa atenção para a interessante similaridade entre a visão em Ezequiel 1:10 e os Evangelhos, embora não sugira que os quatro seres viventes fossem um protótipo dos Evangelhos. Escreve:

Talvez a maioria de nós esteja familiarizada com o paralelismo frequentemente notado entre os quatro Evangelhos e os quatro “seres viventes” na visão inicial do profeta Ezequiel. Os quatro “seres viventes”, ou querubins, são assim descritos em Ezequiel 1:10: “E a semelhança dos seus rostos era como o rosto de homem; e à mão direita, todos os quatro tinham rosto de leão, e à mão esquerda, todos os quatro tinham rosto de boi; e também rosto de águia, todos os quatro”. O leão simboliza força suprema, dignidade real; o homem, a inteligência mais elevada; o boi, serviço humilde; a águia, o celestial, mistério, Divindade.

Em Mateus, encontramos o Rei Messiânico (o leão).
Em Marcos, encontramos o Servo de Javé (o boi).
Em Lucas, encontramos o Filho do Homem (o homem).
Em João, encontramos o Filho de Deus (a águia).

São necessários os quatro aspectos a fim de se obter a verdade completa. Enquanto Soberano, veio para reinar e governar. Enquanto Servo, veio para servir e sofrer. Enquanto Filho do homem, veio para partilhar e compreender. Enquanto Filho de Deus, veio para revelar e redimir. Que maravilhosa junção quádrupla – soberania e humildade; humanidade e divindade!2

Mateus dirige o seu Evangelho primeiramente aos Judeus, a fim de os convencer de que Jesus de Nazaré é o seu Messias, o Rei dos Judeus. Com a genealogia de Jesus, Mateus utiliza também dez citações de concretização, através das quais procura mostrar que este Jesus, embora rejeitado e crucificado, é o há muito esperado Messias do Antigo Testamento (Mt. 1:23; 2:15; 2:18; 2:23; 4:15; 8:15; 12:18-21; 13:35; 21:5; 27:9-10). Mas, ainda que rejeitado pela nação como um todo e crucificado, o Rei deixou atrás de si uma sepultura vazia.

Marcos parece dirigir-se aos Romanos, povo de acção mas de poucas palavras, e apresenta Jesus como o Servo do Senhor, que veio “para dar a Sua vida em resgate de muitos”. Nesta linha de pensamento, Marcos, o Evangelho mais curto, é vívido, activo ou animado, e proporciona um registo de testemunho ocular muito claro, especialmente da última semana da vida de Jesus na Terra. “37 por cento deste Evangelho é dedicado aos eventos da Sua derradeira e mais importante semana”.3

Lucas, o médico historiador, apresenta Jesus como o Filho do Homem perfeito, que veio para “buscar e salvar o que se havia perdido” (Lucas 19:10). Lucas enfatiza fortemente a humanidade verdadeira de Cristo, ao mesmo tempo que declara também a Sua divindade. Algumas pessoas acreditam que Lucas tinha em mente os Gregos em particular, por causa do seu profundo interesse em filosofia humana.

João foca de imediato o leitor (1:1-2) na divindade de Cristo, apresentando Jesus como o Filho de Deus eterno, que concede vida eterna e abundante a todos os que O receberem, crendo n'Ele (João 1:12; 3:16-18, 36; 10:10). Embora redigido para toda a humanidade, o Evangelho de João está escrito especialmente para a Igreja. Cinco capítulos registam os discursos de despedida de Jesus para os Seus discípulos, a fim de os confortar apenas algumas horas antes da Sua morte. Adicionalmente, são expostos sete sinais miraculosos de Jesus no intuito de demonstrar que Jesus É o Salvador e de encorajar por todo o lado as pessoas a crerem n'Ele, de modo a que possam ter vida (João 20:30-31).

Mateus

Autor e Título:

Cada Evangelho recebe o nome do escritor humano que o redigiu. Embora este primeiro Evangelho, tal como acontece com cada um dos restantes, nunca nomeie o seu autor, o testemunho universal da Igreja primitiva é que o apóstolo Mateus o escreveu, e as nossas testemunhas textuais mais antigas atribuem-no a ele ao darem-lhe o título “Segundo Mateus” (Kata Matthaion). Mateus, que foi um dos discípulos originais de Jesus, era um judeu escrevendo aos Judeus acerca d'Aquele que era o seu próprio Messias. O seu nome original era Levi, filho de Alfeu. Mateus trabalhava como publicano, recolhendo impostos para os Romanos na Palestina até ser chamado para seguir o Senhor (Mt. 9:9,10; Marcos 2:14-15). A sua resposta rápida pode sugerir que o seu coração fora já tocado pelo ministério de Jesus.

Cedo foi dado a este Evangelho o título de Kata Matthaion, “Segundo Mateus”. Conforme este título sugere, eram conhecidos outros registos evangélicos naquela altura (a palavra evangelho foi adicionada mais tarde)...4

Data: 50s ou 60s d.C.

As sugestões para a datação de Mateus variam entre 40 d.C. e 140 d.C., mas “o facto de a destruição de Jerusalém em 70 d.C. ser vista como um evento ainda futuro (24:2) parece requerer uma data anterior. Alguns advogam que este foi o primeiro dos Evangelhos a ser redigido (por volta de 50 d.C.), enquanto outros pensam que não foi o primeiro, tendo sido escrito nos anos 60”.5

Tema e Propósito:

Conforme fica evidente nas questões que Jesus colocou aos Seus discípulos em 16:14 ss, Mateus escreveu aos Judeus a fim de responder às suas perguntas a respeito de Jesus de Nazaré. Jesus declarara claramente ser o Messias deles. Era Ele realmente o Messias do Antigo Testamento, predito pelos profetas? Em caso afirmativo, por que é que os líderes religiosos não O receberam, e por que não estabeleceu o reino prometido? Será que este alguma vez será estabelecido e, se sim, quando? Portanto, Mateus dirige-se em primeiro lugar a uma audiência judaica, de modo a mostrar-lhe que este Jesus é o Messias há muito esperado. Tal é visto na genealogia de Jesus (1:1-17); na visitação dos Magos (2:1-12); na Sua entrada em Jerusalém (21:5); no julgamento das nações (25:31-46); na referência frequente ao “reino dos céus”, como é comum nos outros Evangelhos, e nas citações de concretização do Antigo Testamento previamente mencionadas.

Palavras ou Conceitos-Chave:

Jesus, o Messias, o Rei dos Judeus.

Versículos-Chave:

  • 1:20-23. E, projectando ele isto, eis que em sonho lhe apareceu um anjo do Senhor, dizendo: José, filho de David, não temas receber Maria, tua mulher, porque, o que nela está gerado é do Espírito Santo; 21 E dará à luz um filho, e chamarás o seu nome Jesus; porque ele salvará o seu povo dos seus pecados. 22 Tudo isto aconteceu para que se cumprisse o que foi dito da parte do Senhor, pelo profeta, que diz: 23 Eis que a virgem conceberá e dará à luz um filho e chamá-lo-ão pelo nome de Emanuel, que traduzido é: Deus connosco.
  • 16:15-19. Disse-lhes ele: E vós, quem dizeis que eu sou? 16 E Simão Pedro, respondendo, disse: Tu és o Cristo, o Filho do Deus vivo. 17 E Jesus, respondendo, disse-lhe: Bem-aventurado és tu, Simão Barjonas, porque to não revelou a carne e o sangue, mas meu Pai que está nos céus. 18 Pois, também, eu te digo que tu és Pedro, e sobre esta pedra edificarei a minha igreja, e as portas do inferno não prevalecerão contra ela; 19 E eu te darei as chaves do reino dos céus; e tudo o que ligares na terra será ligado nos céus, e tudo o que desligares na terra será desligado nos céus.
  • 28:18-20. E, chegando-se Jesus, falou-lhes, dizendo: É-me dado todo o poder, no céu e na terra. 19 Portanto, ide, ensinai todas as nações, baptizando-as em nome do Pai, e do Filho e do Espírito Santo; 20 Ensinando-as a guardar todas as coisas que eu vos tenho mandado; e eis que eu estou convosco, todos os dias, até à consumação dos séculos. Ámen.

Capítulos-Chave:

  • O Capítulo 1é fundamental na medida em que introduz a genealogia e nascimento de Jesus como filho de David, filho de Abraão, nascido por obra miraculosa do Espírito, sendo José seu pai legal por adopção, mas não o pai físico.
  • O Capítulo 12 é fundamental porque nele vemos o momento decisivo em que os líderes religiosos rejeitam formalmente Jesus como Messias, atribuindo o Seu poder miraculoso a Satanás. A partir daí, Jesus começou a falar em parábolas para esconder a verdade aos indiferentes, dedicando mais tempo aos Seus discípulos.

Como Cristo É Visto em Mateus:

Conforme realçado previamente, o objectivo de Mateus é demonstrar que Jesus é o Messias da expectativa do Antigo Testamento. Ele É o filho de Abraão e David. Assim, Ele É o Rei que vem oferecer o reino. A expressão “reino dos céus” ocorre cerca de trinta e duas vezes neste Evangelho. Para além disso, a fim de mostrar que este Jesus cumpre as expectativas do Antigo Testamento, em dez ocasiões enfatiza especificamente que aquilo que aconteceu na vida de Jesus dá cumprimento ao Antigo Testamento. Adicionalmente, utiliza mais citações e alusões ao Antigo Testamento que qualquer outro livro do Novo Testamento – cerca de 130 vezes.

Plano Geral:

Mateus recai naturalmente sobre nove secções discerníveis:

I.

A Pessoa e Apresentação do Rei (1:1-4:25)

II.

A Proclamação e Pregação do Rei (5:1-7:29)

III.

O Poder do Rei (8:1-11-1)

IV.

O Programa e Rejeição Progressiva do Rei (11:2-16:12)

V.

A Pedagogia e Preparação dos Discípulos do Rei (16:13-20:28)

VI.

A Apresentação do Rei (20:29-23:39)

VII.

As Predições ou Profecias do Rei (24:1-25:46)

VIII.

A Paixão ou Rejeição do Rei (26:1-27:66)

IX.

A Comprovação do Rei (28:1-20)

Marcos

Autor e Título:

Na verdade, o Evangelho de Marcos é anónimo, uma vez que não nomeia o seu autor. O título grego, Kata Markon, “Segundo Marcos”, foi acrescentado mais tarde por um escriba, algures antes de 125 d.C., mas existe evidência sólida e clara (externa e interna) de que Marcos foi o seu autor. “O testemunho unânime dos pais da Igreja primitiva é o de que Marcos, um associado do apóstolo Pedro, foi o autor.”6 Em 112 d.C., Papias citou Marcos como “o intérprete de Pedro”. Dunnett salienta o seguinte: “Uma comparação do sermão de Pedro em Actos 10:36-43 com o Evangelho de Marcos mostra que o primeiro é um esboço da vida de Jesus, que Marcos apresenta com um detalhe muito maior”.7

Embora Marcos não tenha sido um dos discípulos originais de Jesus, era filho de Maria, uma mulher de riqueza e estatuto em Jerusalém (Actos 12:12), companheiro de Pedro (1 Pe. 5:13) e primo de Barnabé (Cl. 4:10). Estas ligações, especialmente a sua associação com Pedro – que, evidentemente, foi a fonte de informação de Marcos –, conferiram autoridade apostólica ao Evangelho de Marcos. Uma vez que Pedro falou dele como “meu filho Marcos” (1 Pd. 5:13), poderá ter sido Pedro quem conduziu Marcos até Cristo.

Adicionalmente, foi também um íntimo associado de Paulo. Ryrie escreve:

Teve o privilégio raro de acompanhar Paulo e Barnabé na primeira viagem missionária, mas não foi capaz de ficar com eles durante toda a jornada. Por causa disto, Paulo recusou-se a levá-lo na segunda viagem, pelo que partiu para Chipre com Barnabé (Actos 15:38-40). Uma dúzia de anos mais tarde, estava novamente com Paulo (Cl. 4:10; Fm. 24) e, mesmo antes da execução de Paulo, foi mandado chamar pelo apóstolo (2 Tm. 4:11). A sua biografia prova que um fracasso na vida não significa o fim da utilidade.8

Data: 50s ou 60s d.C.

A datação de Marcos é algo difícil, embora muitos estudiosos acreditem que este é o primeiro dos quatro Evangelhos. A menos que uma pessoa rejeite o elemento de profecia preditiva, 13:2 mostra claramente que Marcos foi redigido antes de 70 d.C. e da destruição do templo em Jerusalém. Ryrie salienta:

De facto, se Actos tem de ser datado à volta de 61 d.C., e se Lucas, o volume acompanhante, o precedeu, então Marcos tem de ser ainda mais antigo, uma vez que, aparentemente, Lucas usou Marcos na redacção do seu evangelho. Tal aponta para uma data nos anos 50 para Marcos. Porém, muitos estudiosos crêem que Marcos não foi escrito antes de Pedro ter morrido; i.e., depois de 67, mas antes de 70.9

Tema e Propósito:

O tema de Marcos é “Cristo, o Servo”. Este ponto principal é revelado em 10:45: “Porque o Filho do homem também não veio para ser servido, mas para servir e dar a Sua vida em resgate de muitos”. Uma leitura cuidadosa de Marcos mostra como os dois temas deste versículo, serviço e sacrifício, são desvendados por Marcos. Marcos dirige-se primeiramente ao leitor Romano ou Gentio. Em resultado, a genealogia de Jesus é omitida, em conjunto com o Sermão da Montanha, e as condenações da parte dos líderes religiosos recebem menos atenção. Adicionalmente, dado que Marcos apresenta Jesus como o Trabalhador, o Servo do Senhor, o livro foca-se na actividade de Cristo enquanto Servo fiel, dedicando-se efectivamente à Sua obra. Este destaque evidencia-se através do estilo de Marcos, conforme é explícito no seu uso do grego euqus, “imediatamente, de imediato”, ou “logo, então”, que ocorre cerca de 42 vezes neste Evangelho. O seu significado varia desde o sentido imediato, como em 1:10, até ao de ordem lógica (“na devida altura, então”; confira 1:21 [“logo”]; 11:3 [“logo”]).10 Outra ilustração acerca desta ênfase activa é o uso proeminente do presente histórico, por parte de Marcos, de modo a descrever um evento passado, o que era evidentemente feito para fins de vivacidade. 

Palavras-Chave:

Cristo, Servo do Senhor.

Versículos-Chave:

  • 8:34-37. E, chamando a si a multidão, com os seus discípulos, disse-lhes: “Se alguém quiser vir após mim, negue-se a si mesmo, e tome a sua cruz, e siga-me. Porque, qualquer que quiser salvar a sua vida perdê-la-á, mas, qualquer que perder a sua vida, por amor de mim e do evangelho, esse a salvará. Pois que aproveitaria ao homem ganhar todo o mundo e perder a sua alma? Ou que daria o homem pelo resgate da sua alma?”
  • 10:43-45. “Mas, entre vós, não será assim; antes, qualquer que entre vós quiser ser grande, será vosso serviçal; E, qualquer que de entre vós quiser ser o primeiro, será servo de todos. Porque o Filho do homem também, não veio para ser servido, mas para servir e dar a Sua vida em resgate de muitos.”

Capítulos-Chave:

  • O Capítulo 8 constitui um capítulo-chave em Marcos, de forma muito semelhante ao capítulo 12 em Mateus, pois ocorre nele uma mudança em termos de conteúdo e curso do ministério de Jesus. O principal evento que conduz a essa mudança é a confissão de Pedro: “Tu és o Cristo (o Messias)” (8:29). A isto segue-se de imediato um aviso para que não falassem a ninguém acerca da revelação da Sua morte, do chamamento ao discipulado e da transfiguração.

Tal resposta inspirada na fé despoleta uma nova fase em termos de conteúdo e curso do ministério de Jesus. Até então, Ele procurou validar as Suas afirmações enquanto Messias. Mas, agora, começa a fortalecer os Seus homens para o Seu sofrimento e morte, prestes a ocorrer às mãos dos líderes religiosos. Os passos de Jesus começam diariamente a aproximá-lo de Jerusalém – o local onde o Servo Perfeito irá demonstrar a dimensão total da Sua servidão.11

Como Cristo É Visto em Marcos:

É claro que a contribuição de Marcos centra-se especialmente na apresentação do Salvador como o Servo que Se Sacrifica, que entrega obedientemente a Sua vida para resgate de muitos. O ponto principal encontra-se claramente no Seu ministério face às necessidades físicas e espirituais dos outros, colocando-as sempre à frente das Suas próprias necessidades. A ênfase na actividade servil do Salvador é constatada no seguinte:

Apenas dezoito das setenta parábolas de Cristo se encontram em Marcos – algumas destas têm apenas uma única frase –, mas ele regista mais de metade dos trinta e cinco milagres de Cristo, a maior proporção nos Evangelhos.12

Plano Geral:

Sendo o tema do livro Cristo, o Servo, o versículo-chave, 10:45, proporciona a chave para duas divisões naturais do Evangelho: o serviço do Servo (1:1-10:52) e o sacrifício do Servo (11:1-16:20). Podemos dividir isto em cinco secções simples:

I.

A Preparação do Servo para o Serviço (1:1-13)

II.

A Pregação do Servo na Galileia (1:14-9:50)

III.

A Pregação do Servo em Perea (10:1-52)

IV.

A Paixão do Servo em Jerusalém (11:1-15:47)

V.

A Prosperidade do Servo na Ressurreição (16:1-20)

Lucas

Autor e Título:

Tanto Lucas como Actos, dirigidos a Teófilo enquanto obra de dois volumes, são atribuídos a Lucas e, embora Lucas não seja denominado em nenhum lado como o autor de algum deles, bastantes evidências apontam para Lucas, “o médico amado” (Cl. 4:14), como o autor de ambos os livros. De maneira significativa, estes dois livros compõem cerca de 28 por cento do Novo Testamento grego. Os únicos locais onde encontramos o seu nome no Novo Testamento são Colossenses 4:14, 2 Timóteo 4:11 e Filémon 24. Crê-se também que Lucas se referiu a si mesmo nas secções “nós” de Actos (16:10-17; 20:5-21:18; 27:1-28:16). Estas mesmas secções mostram que o autor era um íntimo associado e companheiro de viagem de Paulo. Uma vez que só dois dos associados de Paulo são nomeados na terceira pessoa, a lista pode ser reduzida a Tito e Lucas.

Por processo de eliminação, “Lucas, o médico amado” (Cl. 4:14) e “colaborador” (Fm. 24) de Paulo, torna-se o candidato mais provável. A sua autoria é fundamentada pelo testemunho unânime de antigos escritos Cristãos (e.g., o Cânone Muratori, 170 d.C., e as obras de Ireneu, c. 180).13

A partir de Colossenses 4:10-14, parece ficar evidente que Lucas era gentio, uma vez que Paulo o diferencia dos judeus. Aí o apóstolo declara que, dos seus colaboradores, Aristarco, Marcos e Jesus, chamado o Justo, eram os únicos judeus. Tal sugere que Epafras, Lucas e Demas, também mencionados nestes versículos, eram gentios, não judeus. “A perícia óbvia de Lucas com a língua grega e a sua frase 'na própria linguagem deles' em Actos 1:19 também sugerem que não era judeu”. 14

Nada sabemos acerca da sua vida passada ou conversão, excepto que não foi testemunha ocular da vida de Jesus Cristo (Lucas 1:2). Embora médico de profissão, era em primeiro lugar um evangelista, tendo redigido este evangelho e o livro dos Actos e acompanhado Paulo na obra missionária... Encontrava-se com Paulo na altura do martírio do apóstolo (2 Tm. 4:11) mas, relativamente à sua vida posterior, não dispomos de factos certos.15

Data: 60 d.C.

Dois períodos comummente sugeridos para a datação do Evangelho de Lucas são... (1) 59-63 d.C., e (2) os anos 70 ou 80, mas a conclusão de Actos mostra-nos que Paulo se encontrava em Roma e, uma vez que Lucas é o tratado precedente, escrito antes de Actos (Actos 1:1), o Evangelho de Lucas deverá ter sido redigido num período anterior, à volta de 60 d.C.. Contudo, sugerindo que o Evangelho de Lucas recebeu a sua forma final na Grécia e não em Roma, alguns apontam para 70 d.C.

Tema e Propósito:

O propósito de Lucas é claramente declarado no prólogo do seu Evangelho.

1:1-4 Tendo, pois, muitos empreendido pôr em ordem a narração dos factos que entre nós se cumpriram, 1:2 Segundo nos transmitiram os mesmos que os presenciaram, desde o princípio, e foram ministros da palavra, 1:3 Pareceu-me, também, a mim conveniente descrevê-los a ti, ó excelente Teófilo, por sua ordem, havendo-me já informado, minuciosamente, de tudo, desde o princípio; 1:4 Para que conheças a certeza das coisas de que já estás informado.

Deve prestar-se atenção a vários aspectos relativos à sua abordagem de apresentação do evangelho:

Lucas declara que a sua própria obra foi estimulada pelo trabalho de outros (1:1), que consultou testemunhas oculares (1:2) e que examinou minuciosamente e ordenou a informação (1:3) sob a orientação do Espírito Santo, de modo a instruir Teófilo acerca da fiabilidade histórica da fé (1:4). Trata-se de uma redacção cuidadosamente investigada e documentada.16

Enquanto gentio, Lucas ter-se-á sentido responsável por escrever o seu registo em dois volumes da vida de Cristo, de modo a que fosse disponibilizado aos leitores gentios. Tal parece evidente pelo facto de que Lucas “traduz termos aramaicos com palavras gregas e explica a geografia e costumes judaicos, tornando o seu Evangelho mais inteligível para o seu universo de leitores, originalmente grego”.17

Lucas, escrito pelo “médico amado”, é o Evangelho mais longo e abrangente. Apresenta o Salvador como o Filho do Homem, o Homem Perfeito que veio procurar e salvar o que estava perdido (19:10). Em Mateus, vemos Jesus como Filho de David, Rei de Israel; em Marcos, vemo-Lo como o Servo do Senhor, servindo outros; em Lucas, vemo-Lo como o Filho do Homem, indo ao encontro das necessidades humanas, um homem perfeito entre homens, escolhido de entre os homens, testado entre eles e sumamente qualificado para ser o Salvador e Sumo-Sacerdote. Em Mateus, vemos combinações de eventos relevantes; em Marcos, vemos instantâneos de eventos relevantes; mas, em Lucas, vemos mais detalhes destes eventos por parte do médico/historiador.

A Sua natureza humana perfeita enquanto o Filho do Homem, mas também Filho de Deus, é realçada pelo seguinte:

  1. O Seu nascimento físico, com a Sua genealogia traçada até Adão (3:38) (Mateus só vai até Abraão).
  2. O Seu desenvolvimento mental é enfatizado em 2:40-52.
  3. A Sua perfeição moral e espiritual é também realçada aquando do Seu baptismo pela voz do Pai, vinda do Céu, e pela unção do Espírito Santo.

Assim, em Jesus temos Alguém que é masculinidade perfeita – física, mental e espiritualmente.

Palavras-Chave:

Jesus, o Filho do Homem.

Versículos-Chave:

  • 1:1-4 Tendo, pois, muitos empreendido pôr em ordem a narração dos factos que entre nós se cumpriram, 1:2 Segundo nos transmitiram os mesmos que os presenciaram, desde o princípio, e foram ministros da palavra, 1:3 Pareceu-me, também, a mim conveniente descrevê-los a ti, ó excelente Teófilo, por sua ordem, havendo-me já informado, minuciosamente, de tudo, desde o princípio; 1:4 Para que conheças a certeza das coisas de que já estás informado.
  • 19:10 Pois o Filho do Homem veio procurar e salvar o que estava perdido.

Capítulos-Chave:

Capítulo 15. Em vista do tema destacado em 19:10, a ênfase em “procurar” nas três parábolas do capítulo 15 (a ovelha perdida, a moeda perdida e o filho pródigo) torna-o um capítulo-chave no Evangelho de Lucas.

Como Cristo É Visto em Lucas:

A humanidade e compaixão de Jesus são repetidamente enfatizadas no Evangelho de Lucas. Lucas proporciona o registo mais completo dos antepassados, nascimento e desenvolvimento de Cristo. Ele É o Filho do Homem ideal, que se identificava com a tristeza e difícil situação do homem pecaminoso, de modo a carregar as nossas mágoas e oferecer-nos o inestimável presente da salvação. Sozinho, Jesus concretiza o ideal grego da perfeição humana.18

Plano Geral:

I.

O Prólogo: O Método e Propósito da Redacção (1:1-4)

II.

A Identificação do Filho do Homem com os Homens (1:1-4:13)

III.

O Ministério do Filho do Homem aos Homens (4:14-9:50)

IV.

A Rejeição do Filho do Homem por parte dos Homens (9:51-19:44)

V.

O Sofrimento do Filho do Homem pelos Homens (19:45-23:56)

VI.

A Autenticação (através da ressurreição) do Filho do Homem Diante dos Homens (24:1-53)

João

Autor e Título:

Desde cedo no século segundo, a tradição eclesial atribuiu o quarto Evangelho ao apóstolo João, filho de Zebedeu e irmão de Tiago. Jesus chamou a João e Tiago “Filhos do Trovão” (Marcos 3:17). Salomé, a sua mãe, servira Jesus na Galileia e estava presente aquando da Sua crucificação (Marcos 15:40-41). Não só era próximo de Jesus enquanto um dos Doze, mas também é usualmente identificado como “o discípulo a quem Jesus amava” (13:23; 18:15, 16; 19:26-27), pertencendo ao círculo íntimo e ao grupo de três pessoas que Cristo levou Consigo ao Monte da Transfiguração (Mt. 17:1). Também era um íntimo associado de Pedro. Após a ascensão de Cristo, João tornou-se uma das pessoas que Paulo identificou como as “colunas” da Igreja (Gl. 2:9).

No sentido estrito do termo, o quarto Evangelho é anónimo. Não é fornecido no texto o nome do seu autor. Tal não é surpreendente, já que um evangelho difere de uma epístola (carta) quanto à forma literária. Cada carta de Paulo começa com o seu nome, conforme o costume habitual dos escritores de cartas no mundo antigo. Nenhum dos autores humanos dos quatro Evangelhos se identificou pelo nome. Porém, isso não quer dizer que não seja possível saber quem foram os autores. Um autor pode revelar-se indirectamente ao longo da escrita ou, por tradição, pode ser bem conhecido que a obra provém dele.

A evidência interna proporciona a cadeia de ligações que se segue a respeito do autor do Quarto Evangelho. (1) Em João 21:24, a palavra “as [estas coisas]” refere-se a todo o Evangelho, não apenas ao último capítulo. (2) “O discípulo” em 21:24 era “o discípulo a quem Jesus amava” (21:7). (3) A partir de 21:7, torna-se claro que o discípulo a quem Jesus amava era uma das sete pessoas mencionadas em 21:2 (Simão Pedro, Tomé, Natanael, os dois filhos de Zebedeu e dois discípulos não nomeados). (4) “O discípulo a quem Jesus amava” estava sentado perto do Senhor na Última Ceia, e Pedro fez-lhe sinal (13:23-24). (5) Deve ter pertencido aos Doze, uma vez que apenas eles se encontravam com o Senhor aquando da Última Ceia (confira Marcos 14:17; Lucas 22:14). (6) No Evangelho, João era bastante próximo de Pedro e, assim, parece ter sido um dos três associados mais íntimos (confira João 20:2-10; Marcos 5:37-38; 9:2-3; 14:33). Uma vez que Tiago, irmão de João, morreu no ano 44 D.C., não foi o autor (Actos 12:2). (7) “O outro discípulo” (João 18:15-16) parece referir-se ao “discípulo a quem Jesus amava”, dado que assim é denominado em 20:2. (8) O “discípulo a quem Jesus amava” esteve ao pé da cruz (19:26), e 19:35 parece referir-se a ele. (9) A declaração do autor, “Vimos a Sua glória” (1:14), era a afirmação de alguém que fora testemunha ocular (confira 1 João 1:1-4).

A união de todos estes factos constitui um bom argumento a favor de o autor do Quarto Evangelho ter sido João, um dos filhos de um pescador chamado Zebedeu.19

Data: 85-90 d.C.

Alguns críticos procuraram colocar a datação de João bem no século segundo (à volta de 150 d.C.), mas uma série de factores provou que tal era falso.

Achados arqueológicos atestando a autenticidade do texto de João (e.g., João 4:11; 5:2-3), estudos de vocabulário (e.g., synchrõntai, 4:9), a descoberta de manuscritos (e.g., P52) e os Rolos do Mar Morto têm conferido forte apoio a uma datação anterior de João. Por isso, é comum hoje em dia encontrar estudiosos não-conservadores defendendo uma data tão antiga como 45-66 d.C.. Uma data antiga é possível. Mas este Evangelho tem sido conhecido na Igreja como o “Quarto”, e os pais da Igreja primitiva acreditavam que fora escrito quando João era já um homem de idade. Por conseguinte, uma data entre 85 e 95 é melhor. João 21:18, 23 requer a passagem de algum tempo, com Pedro a envelhecer e João a viver mais do que ele.20

Tema e Propósito:

Provavelmente mais do que qualquer outro livro da Bíblia, João afirma claramente qual o tema e propósito do seu Evangelho. De maneira significativa, esta declaração de propósito segue-se ao encontro de Tomé com o salvador ressuscitado. Se bem se recorda, Tomé duvidara da realidade da ressurreição (João 20:24-25). Imediatamente depois disto, o Senhor apareceu aos discípulos e dirigiu-se a Tomé com estas palavras: “Chega aqui o teu dedo e vê as Minhas mãos; aproxima a tua mão e mete-a no Meu lado; e não sejas incrédulo, mas crente”. Tomé declarou então: “Meu Senhor e meu Deus!”. O Senhor disse depois a Tomé: “Porque me viste, creste? Bem-aventurados os que não viram e creram”. É depois desta troca de ideias e foco na necessidade de crer em Jesus que João nos concede o tema e declaração de propósito:

20:30 Jesus, pois, operou também, em presença dos seus discípulos, muitos outros sinais, que não estão escritos neste livro. 20:31 Estes, porém, foram escritos, para que creiais que Jesus é o Cristo, o Filho de Deus, e para que, crendo, tenhais vida em seu nome.

Em concordância com esta declaração de propósito, João seleccionou sete sinais-milagres para revelar a pessoa e missão de Cristo, a fim de motivar as pessoas a acreditarem em Jesus como Salvador. O termo usado a respeito destes milagres é shmeion, “um sinal, uma marca distintiva” e “um sinal consistindo num milagre, uma maravilha, algo contrário à natureza”. João refere-se sempre aos milagres de Jesus através deste termo, porque shmeion enfatizava a importância da acção, mais do que o milagre em si (veja, e.g., 4:54; 6:14; 9:16; 11:47). Estes sinais revelavam a glória de Jesus (veja 1:14; confira Is. 35:1-2; Joel 3:18; Am. 9:13). Os sete sinais consistiam no seguinte: (1) a transformação da água em vinho (2:1-11); (2) a cura do filho de um oficial (4:46-54); (3) a cura do paralítico (5:1-18); (4) alimentar as multidões (6:6-13); (5) caminhar sobre as águas (6:16-21); (6) conceder visão ao cego (9:1-7); e (7) a ressurreição de Lázaro (11:1-45).

O tema especial e propósito de João são também facilmente discerníveis através da natureza distinta do seu Evangelho, quando comparado com Mateus, Marcos e Lucas.

Quando alguém compara o Evangelho de João com os outros três Evangelhos, depara-se com o carácter distinto da apresentação de João. João não inclui a genealogia de Jesus, nascimento, baptismo, tentação, expulsão de demónios, parábolas, transfiguração, instituição da Ceia do Senhor, Sua agonia no Getsémani nem a Sua ascensão. A apresentação que João faz de Jesus enfatiza o Seu ministério em Jerusalém, as festas da nação judaica, os contactos de Jesus com indivíduos sob a forma de conversas particulares (e.g., capítulos 3-4; 18:28-19:16) e o Seu ministério para com os Seus discípulos (capítulos 13-17). A parte principal do Evangelho está contida num “Livro de Sinais” (2:1-12:50), que abrange sete milagres ou “sinais” que proclamam Jesus como o Messias, o Filho de Deus. Este “Livro de Sinais” também contém grandes discursos de Jesus, que explicam e proclamam a importância dos sinais. Por exemplo, após alimentar 5,000 pessoas (6:1-15), Jesus revelou-Se como o Pão da Vida, que o Pai celestial concede para dar a vida ao mundo (6:25-35). Outra característica exclusiva e notável do Quarto Evangelho é a série de afirmações “Eu Sou”, realizadas por Jesus (confira 6:35; 8:12; 10:7, 9, 11, 14; 11:25; 14:6; 15:1, 5).

O carácter distinto deste Evangelho deverá ser mantido em perspectiva. Os Evangelhos não se destinavam a ser biografias. A partir de um conjunto muito mais amplo de informação, cada escritor do Evangelho seleccionou o material que serviria o seu propósito. Tem sido estimado que, caso todas as palavras citadas em Mateus, Marcos e Lucas como saídas da boca de Jesus fossem lidas em voz alta, o tempo necessário para a sua proclamação seria de apenas três horas...21

Palavras-Chave:

O conceito-chave em João é Jesus, o Filho de Deus, aquele que é o Lógos, a própria revelação de Deus (João 1:1, 14, 18). Mas há um número de outras palavras-chave na apresentação de Cristo, tais como verdade, luz, trevas, verbo, sabedoria, crer, permanecer, amar, mundo, testemunho e julgamento. O verbo crer (grego, pisteuw) ocorre 98 vezes neste Evangelho. O substantivo “fé” (grego, pistis) não aparece.

Versículos-Chave:

  • 1:11-13. Veio para o que era seu, e os seus não o receberam. Mas, a todos quantos o receberam, deu-lhes o poder de serem feitos filhos de Deus, aos que crêem no seu nome; os quais não nasceram do sangue, nem da vontade da carne, nem da vontade do varão, mas de Deus.
  • 1:14. E o Verbo se fez carne, e habitou entre nós, e vimos a sua glória, como a glória do unigénito do Pai, cheio de graça e de verdade.
  • 3:16. Porque Deus amou o mundo de tal maneira, que deu o seu Filho unigénito, para que todo aquele que nele crê não pereça, mas tenha a vida eterna.
  • 20:30-31. Jesus, pois, operou também, em presença dos seus discípulos, muitos outros sinais, que não estão escritos neste livro. Estes, porém, foram escritos, para que creiais que Jesus é o Cristo, o Filho de Deus, e para que, crendo, tenhais vida em seu nome.

Capítulos-Chave:

  • É difícil seleccionar um capítulo-chave no Evangelho de João, mas certamente a conversa do Senhor com Nicodemos no capítulo 3 permite que este seja considerado um dos capítulos-chave. João 3:16 é talvez citado mais vezes do que qualquer outro versículo da Bíblia. Também importantes neste capítulo são as palavras do Salvador relativamente à necessidade de nascer de novo ou do alto (veja 3:3-6).
  • Outros capítulos-chave são o encontro com a mulher no poço, João 4, os discursos de Jesus com os discípulos, preparando-os para a Sua ausência, João 13-16, e a oração do Senhor ao Pai em João 17.

Como Cristo É Visto em João:

Embora a divindade de Cristo seja um tema proeminente em muitas passagens da Bíblia, nenhum outro livro apresenta melhores argumentos a favor da essência divina de Jesus enquanto o Filho encarnado de Deus do que este Evangelho. Sucede que a pessoa identificada como “O homem chamado Jesus” (9:11) é também chamada de “Deus Unigénito” (1:18, NIV), “Cristo, o Filho de Deus” (6:69, KJV) ou “o Santo de Deus” (6:69, NIV, NASB, NET)22.

Esta declaração da divindade de Jesus Cristo é desenvolvida ainda mais através de sete afirmações “EU SOU”, feitas por Jesus e registadas no Evangelho de João. Estas sete afirmações são as seguintes: Eu sou o pão da vida (6:35), Eu sou a luz do mundo (8:12), Eu sou a porta (10:7,9), Eu sou o bom pastor (10:11, 14), Eu sou a ressurreição e a vida (11:25), Eu sou o caminho, a verdade e a vida (14:6), Eu sou a vinha verdadeira (15:1, 5).

Outro traço distintivo do Evangelho de João, focando-se novamente na pessoa de Cristo, são os cinco testemunhos que atestam Jesus como o Filho de Deus. Em João 5:31 ss, Jesus responde aos argumentos dos Seus oponentes. Estes argumentavam que o Seu testemunho não dispunha de outras testemunhas que o corroborassem, mas Jesus mostra que tal não é verdade, passando a lembrá-los de que outras testemunhas atestavam a validade das suas afirmações: o Seu Pai (vs. 32, 37), João Baptista (v. 33), os Seus milagres (v. 36), as Escrituras (v. 39) e Moisés (v. 46). Mais tarde, em 8:14, declara que o Seu testemunho é de facto verdadeiro.

…Em certas ocasiões, Jesus equipara-se a Si mesmo ao “EU SOU” do Antigo Testamento, ou Yahweh (veja 4:25-26; 8:24, 28, 58; 13:19; 18:5-6, 8). Algumas das afirmações mais decisivas a respeito da Sua divindade encontram-se aqui (1:1; 8:58; 10:30; 14:9; 20:28).23

Plano Geral:

I. O Prólogo: A Encarnação do Filho de Deus (1:1-18)

A. A Divindade de Cristo (1:1-2)

B. A Obra Pré-Encarnada de Cristo (1:3-5)

C. O Precursor de Cristo (1:6-8)

D. A Rejeição de Cristo (1:9-11)

E. A Aceitação de Cristo (1:12-13)

F. A Encarnação de Cristo (1:14-18)

II. A Apresentação do Filho de Deus (1:19-4:54)

A. Por João Baptista (1:19-34)

B. Aos Discípulos de João (1:35-51)

C. Nas Bodas de Caná (2:1-11)

D. No Templo de Jerusalém (2:12-25)

E. A Nicodemos (3:1-21)

A. Por João Baptista (3:22-36)

G. À Mulher Samaritana (4:1-42)

H. A um Oficial de Cafarnaum (4:43-54)

III. A Oposição ao Filho de Deus (5:1-12:50)

A. Na Festa em Jerusalém (5:1-47)

B. Durante a Altura da Páscoa na Galileia (6:1-71)

C. Na Festa dos Tabernáculos em Jerusalém (7:1-10:21)

D. Na Festa da Dedicação em Jerusalém (10:22-42)

E. Em Betânia (11:1-12:11)

F. Em Jerusalém (12:12-50)

IV. A Instrução por parte do Filho do Homem (13:1-16:33)

A. A Respeito do Perdão (13:1-20)

B. A Respeito da Sua Traição (13:21-30)

C. A Respeito da Sua Partida (13:31-38)

D. A Respeito do Céu (14:1-14)

E. A Respeito do Espírito Santo (14:15-26)

F. A Respeito da Paz (14:27-31)

G. A Respeito da Produtividade (15:1-17)

H. A Respeito do Mundo (15:18-16:6)

I. A Respeito do Espírito Santo (16:7-15)

J. A Respeito do Seu Regresso (16:16-33)

V. A Intercessão do Filho de Deus (17:1-26)

VI. A Crucificação do Filho de Deus (18:1-19:42)

VII. A Ressurreição do Filho de Deus (20:1-31)

A. O Túmulo Vazio (20:1-9)

B. As Aparições do Senhor Ressuscitado (20:10-31)

VIII. O Epílogo: A Aparição junto ao Lago (21:1-25)

A. A Aparição aos Sete Discípulos (21:1-14)

B. As Palavras dirigidas a Pedro (21:15-23)

C. A Conclusão do Evangelho (21:24-25)

Actos

Autor e Título:

Embora o autor não seja nomeado em Actos, a evidência leva à conclusão de que se tratou de Lucas. Conforme previamente mencionado, Actos é o segundo volume de um tratado de duas partes escrito por Lucas, o médico, a Teófilo, acerca de “tudo quanto Jesus começou a fazer e a ensinar”. Apoiando a ideia de Lucas como autor, Ryrie escreve:

Que o autor de Actos acompanhava Paulo fica claro nas passagens do livro em que “nós” e “nos” são utilizados (16:10-17; 20:5-21:18; 27:1-28:16). Estas secções excluem outros associados conhecidos de Paulo que não Lucas, e Colossenses 4:14 e Filémon 24 apontam afirmativamente para Lucas, que era médico. O uso frequente de termos médicos também fundamenta esta conclusão (1:3; 3:7 ss.; 9:18, 33; 13:11; 28:1-10). Lucas respondeu ao chamamento macedónico com Paulo, ficou encarregue do trabalho em Filipos durante cerca de seis anos e, mais tarde, esteve com Paulo em Roma durante o período da sua prisão domiciliária. Foi provavelmente durante este último período que o livro foi escrito. Caso tivesse sido redigido mais tarde, seria muito difícil explicar a ausência de referência a momentos tão decisivos como o incêndio de Roma, o martírio de Paulo ou a destruição de Jerusalém.24

A respeito do título, todos os manuscritos gregos disponíveis designam-no pelo título Praxeis, “Actos”, ou pelo título “Os Actos dos Apóstolos”. Desconhece-se ao certo como ou porque recebeu este título. Na verdade, “Os Actos dos Apóstolos” talvez não seja o título mais exacto, uma vez que não abrange os actos de todos os apóstolos. Apenas Pedro e Paulo são realmente enfatizados, embora a promessa da vinda do Espírito seja feita a todos os apóstolos em Actos 1:2-8, que naquela altura deveriam ir por todo o mundo para pregar o evangelho no poder do Espírito (contudo, veja 4:32). Muitos sentem que o livro seria intitulado de uma forma mais exacta como “Os Actos do Espírito Santo”, uma vez que descreve a difusão do Cristianismo a partir do momento da vinda do Espírito em Actos 2, conforme prometido em Actos 1:8.

Data: 61 d.C.

As questões concernentes à datação do livro são sumariadas por Stanley Toussaint da seguinte maneira:

A redacção de Actos deverá ter tido lugar antes da destruição de Jerusalém, em 70 d.C.. Certamente, um evento de tal magnitude não seria ignorado. Isto é especialmente verdade à luz de um dos temas básicos do livro: Deus, que a partir dos judeus se dirige aos gentios, face à rejeição dos judeus relativamente a Jesus Cristo.

Lucas dificilmente omitiria um registo da morte de Paulo, tradicionalmente datada entre 66 e 68 d.C., caso tivesse ocorrido antes de escrever Actos.

Da mesma forma, também não mencionou as perseguições neronianas, que começaram após o grande incêndio de Roma, em 64 d.C..

Para além disso, uma defesa do Cristianismo diante de Nero baseada no Livro de Actos, apelando ao que oficiais de classes mais baixas haviam decidido a respeito de Paulo, teria feito pouco sentido no período de antagonismo neroniano. Numa altura em que Nero estava tão determinado a destruir a Igreja, a defesa apresentada em Actos teria surtido pouco efeito na sua dissuasão.

A data usualmente aceite por estudiosos conservadores para redacção de Actos situa-se à volta de 60-62 d.C.. De modo concordante, o local de redacção terá sido Roma ou, possivelmente, Cesareia e Roma. Por essa altura, a libertação de Paulo estaria iminente ou acabara de ocorrer.25

Tema e Propósito:

O livro de Actos destaca-se pelo seu carácter único entre os livros do Novo Testamento, uma vez que proporciona sozinho uma ponte para esses mesmos livros. Enquanto segundo tratado de Lucas, Actos dá continuidade ao que Jesus “começou a fazer e a ensinar” (1:1), conforme registado nos Evangelhos. Inicia-se com a Ascensão de Cristo e prossegue até ao período das Epístolas do Novo Testamento. Nele temos a continuação do ministério de Jesus Cristo através do Espírito Santo, em actuação nos apóstolos, que avançaram na pregação e estabelecimento da Igreja, corpo de Cristo. Actos é a ligação histórica entre os Evangelhos e as Epístolas.

Não só estabelece para nós esta ponte, mas também proporciona um registo da vida de Paulo, concedendo-nos o contexto histórico das suas cartas. No processo, Actos volta a contar os primeiros 30 anos da vida da Igreja.

Após sumariar várias perspectivas a respeito do propósito de Actos, Toussaint escreve:

O propósito do Livro de Actos pode ser definido como se segue: Explicar, em parceria com o Evangelho de Lucas, o progresso organizado e soberanamente dirigido da mensagem do reino, desde os judeus até aos gentios, e desde Jerusalém até Roma. No Evangelho de Lucas, levanta-se a seguinte questão: “Se o Cristianismo teve as suas raízes no Antigo Testamento e no Judaísmo, como se tornou uma religião mundial?”. O Livro de Actos continua na linha do Evangelho de Lucas, a fim de dar resposta ao mesmo problema.26

Actos 1:8 exprime o tema do livro – o Espírito Santo interior, que capacita o povo de Deus para ser testemunha do Salvador, tanto em Jerusalém (a base operacional) como em toda a Judeia e Samaria (as áreas imediatamente circundantes), e até à parte mais remota da terra (o mundo).

Palavras-Chave:

  • O conceito-chave de Actos seria o crescimento da Igreja em todo o mundo.
  • Duas palavras-chave são “testemunho” ou “testemunhas” e “o Espírito Santo”.

Versículos-Chave:

  • 1:8. Mas recebereis a virtude do Espírito Santo, que há-de vir sobre vós; e ser-me-eis testemunhas, tanto em Jerusalém como em toda a Judeia e Samaria, e até aos confins da terra.
  • 2:42-47. E perseveravam na doutrina dos apóstolos, e na comunhão, e no partir do pão, e nas orações. 2:43 E em toda a alma havia temor, e muitas maravilhas e sinais se faziam pelos apóstolos. 2:44 E todos os que criam estavam juntos, e tinham tudo em comum. 2:45 E vendiam as suas propriedades e fazendas, e repartiam com todos, segundo cada um necessitasse. 2:46 E, perseverando unânimes, todos os dias, no templo, e partindo o pão em casa, comiam juntos com alegria e singeleza de coração, 2:47 Louvando a Deus e caindo na graça de todo o povo. E todos os dias acrescentava o Senhor, à igreja, aqueles que se haviam de salvar.

Capítulos-Chave:

  • Uma vez que a concretização da missão global da Igreja quanto a um alcance mundial depende da vinda do Espírito Santo, o capítulo 2 é, naturalmente, o capítulo-chave. Este capítulo regista o cumprimento de 1:8 no dia de Pentecostes, quando o Espírito Santo veio e iniciou o Seu ministério de baptismo de crentes no corpo de Cristo, a Igreja (compare 1:5; 11:15-16 com 1 Co. 12:13), começando a habitar em todos os fiéis e capacitando-os a ser testemunhas do Salvador.

Intervenientes-Chave:

Os intervenientes-chave incluem Pedro, Estêvão, Filipe, Tiago, Barnabé e Paulo.

Como Cristo É Visto em Actos:

 Salvador ressuscitado é o tema central dos sermões e apologias em Actos. As Escrituras do Antigo Testamento, a ressurreição histórica, o testemunho apostólico e o poder de convicção do Espírito Santo – todos testemunham que Jesus É o Cristo e o Senhor (veja os sermões de Pedro em 2:22-36; 10:34-43). “Dele todos os profetas dão testemunho, anunciando que todos os que n'Ele crêem recebem o perdão dos pecados por meio do Seu nome” (10:43). “Em nenhum outro há salvação, porque debaixo do céu nenhum outro nome foi dado aos homens pelo qual devamos ser salvos” (4:12).27

Plano Geral:

Actos pode ser naturalmente planificado em torno de Actos 1:8, a difusão do evangelho desde Jerusalém até à Judeia e Samaria, e até aos confins da terra.28

I. O Testemunho em Jerusalém (1:1-6:7)

A. A Expectativa dos Escolhidos (1:1-2:47) Relatório de progresso nº 1: “E o Senhor cada dia lhes ajuntava outros, que estavam a caminho da salvação” (2:47).

B. A Expansão da Igreja em Jerusalém (3:1-6:7) Relatório de progresso nº 2: “Divulgava-se sempre mais a palavra de Deus. Multiplicava-se consideravelmente o número de discípulos em Jerusalém” (6:7).

II. O Testemunho em toda a Judeia e Samaria (6:8-9:31)

A. O Martírio de Estêvão (6:8-8:1a)

1. A Prisão de Estêvão (6:8-7:1)

2. O Discurso de Estêvão (7:2-53)

3. O Ataque a Estêvão (7:54-8:1a)

B. O Ministério de Filipe (8:1b-40)

C. A Mensagem de Saulo (9:1-19a)

D. Os Conflitos de Saulo (9:19b-31) Relatório de progresso nº 3: “Assim, pois, as igrejas em toda a Judeia, e Galileia e Samaria tinham paz, e eram edificadas; e se multiplicavam, andando no temor do Senhor e na consolação do Espírito Santo” (9:31).

III. O Testemunho até aos Confins da Terra (9:32-28:31)

A. A Disseminação da Igreja até Antioquia (9:32-12:24) Relatório de progresso nº4: “Entretanto, a palavra de Deus crescia e espalhava-se sempre mais” (12:24).

B. A Disseminação da Igreja até à Ásia Menor (12:25-16:5) Relatório de progresso nº5: “Assim as igrejas eram confirmadas na fé, e cresciam em número de dia para dia” (16:5).

C. A Disseminação da Igreja até à Região do Egeu (16:6-19:20) Relatório de progresso nº6: “Foi assim que o poder do Senhor fez crescer a palavra e a tornou sempre mais eficaz” (19:20).

D. A Disseminação da Igreja até Roma (19:21-28:31) Relatório de progresso nº 7: “Paulo... recebia todos os que vinham procurá-lo. Pregava o Reino de Deus e ensinava as coisas a respeito do Senhor Jesus Cristo, com toda a liberdade e sem proibição” (28:30-31).

Artigo original por J. Hampton Keathley III, Th.M.

Tradução de C. Oliveira

J. Hampton Keathley III, Th.M., licenciou-se em 1966 no Seminário Teológico de Dallas, trabalhando como pastor durante 28 anos. Em Agosto de 2001, foi-lhe diagnosticado cancro do pulmão e, no dia 29 de Agosto de 2002, partiu para casa, para junto do Senhor.

Hampton escreveu diversos artigos para a Fundação de Estudos Bíblicos (Biblical Studies Foundation), ensinando ocasionalmente Grego do Novo Testamento no Instituto Bíblico Moody, Extensão Noroeste para Estudos Externos, em Spokane, Washington.


1 Machen, p.17.

2 J. Sidlow Baxter, Explore The Book, A Basic and Broadly Interpretative Course of Bible Study From Genesis to Revelation, Vol. 5, Período Intertestamentário e os Evangelhos, Zondervan, Grand Rapids, 1960, p. 120.

3Bruce Wilkinson e Kenneth Boa, Talk Thru The Bible (Caminhada Bíblica), Thomas Nelson, Nashville, 1983, p. 305.

4 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 308.

5 Charles Caldwell Ryrie, Ryrie Study Bible, Expanded Edition, Moody, p. 1509.

6 John F. Walvoord, Roy B. Zuck, editores, The Bible Knowledge Commentary, Victor Books, Wheaton, 1983,1985, versão electrónica.

7 Walter M. Dunnett, Professor do Novo Testamento, Instituto Bíblico Moody , New Testament Survey, Associação “Evangelical Teacher Training”, Wheaton, 1967, p. 17.

8 Ryrie, p. 1574.

9 Ryrie, p. 1574.

10 Walvoord/Zuck, versão electrónica.

11 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 320.

12 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 321.

13 The NIV Study Bible Notes, Zondervan NIV Bible Library, Zondervan, Grand Rapids, 1985, versão electrónica.

14 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 327.

15 Ryrie, p. 1614.

16 Ryrie, p. 1614.

17 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 328.

18 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 328.

19 Walvoord/Zuck, versão electrónica.

20 Walvoord/Zuck, versão electrónica.

21 Walvoord/Zuck, versão electrónica.

22 Nota de Tradução: sugerem-se as seguintes versões bíblicas portuguesas para melhor compreensão do texto: 1:18, NVI; 6:69, JFA-RC; 6:69, NVI, JFA-RA e Bíblia Ave Maria.

23 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 338.

24 Ryrie, p. 1724.

25 Walvoord/Zuck, versão electrónica.

26 Walvoord/Zuck, versão electrónica.

27 Wilkinson/Boa, p. 353.

28 O plano geral aqui utilizado segue o de Dr. Stanley em Bible Knowledge Commentary, editado por Walvoord e Zuck, versão electrónica.

Related Topics: Canon, Introductions, Arguments, Outlines

True Comfort

Related Media

In the course of our lives we find a growing need for comfort, especially in the midst of difficult times. It is no surprise, then, the concept of comfort occurs quite often in the Scriptures. One of the earliest examples of this occurs in the book of Job. In the midst of his suffering 3 “comforters” come to advise Job. By the end of the first round of their speeches (Job, chapters 4-14) Job realizes that they had given little or no comfort. Accordingly, during the second (of three rounds of speaking) Job could say to his friends, “Miserable comforters are you all” (Job 16:2). Moreover, he tells them that were the situation reversed, his mouth would “encourage” them so that “comfort from my lips would bring you bring you relief” (Job 16:5).

Indeed, when our friends and family are in distress, it is our privilege to bring comfort and encouragement to them. Interestingly, in the closing chapter of the book of Job we find that a restored Job experienced such comfort (42:10-11).

The Psalmists often express the need for comfort. Thus in the long Psalm 119 the Psalmist pleads with God for the comfort of His presence:

My soul faints with longing for your salvation,
For I put my hope in your word.
My eyes fail looking for your promise;
I say, “When will you comfort me?” (Psalm 119:81-82)

Interestingly, earlier he had assured the Lord,

My comfort in my suffering is this:
Your promise preserves my life.

I remember your ancient laws O LORD,
And find comfort in them. (vv. 50, 52)

Again in verses 75-76 he pleads with God—this time on the basis of His faithfulness:

I know, O LORD, that your laws are righteous,
And in faithfulness you have afflicted me.
May your unfailing love be my comfort,
According to your promise to your servant.

Similarly, Isaiah points out that the Great Comforter does surely bring comfort to His afflicted people , even in the most dire circumstances (Isa. 49:13). Not surprisingly Isaiah instructs his readers likewise to be those who comfort their fellow man (Isa. 46:1-2; cf. 61:2).

In the New Testament we see that Paul is one who does his best to comfort others. Thus he tells the Thessalonian believers:

You are witnesses, and so is God, of how holy, righteous and blameless we were among you. For you know that we dealt with each of you as a father deals with his own children, encouraging, comforting and urging you to live lives worthy of God, who calls you into His kingdom and glory. (1 Thess. 2:11-12)

Such is built upon the premise that because a glorious, eternal kingdom awaits, as Walvoord explains, “God has called us to a walk that is in keeping with our destiny.”1 Leon Morris adds:

His love does not grow less no matter how low we may fall, yet we should not waiver in our grasp of the complementary truth that such a God must be served with all our powers. Nothing less can be offered to Him who gave His Son for us than all we have and all that we are.2

Paul’s most informative need of a proper and worthy walk is found in his second epistle to the Corinthians. In his instructions to the Corinthians he gives what is perhaps the key passage concerning Christian comfort. It is that which comes from God. Paul begins his second letter with this very theme (2 Cor. 1:1-7). Central to the teaching in this section is verses 3-4:

Praise be to the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, the Father of compassion and the God of all comfort, who comforts us in all our troubles, so that we can comfort those in any trouble with the comfort we have received from God.

Indeed, it is the Lord who ultimately is the author and active source of all comfort. As Hodge remarks,

God is the author of consolation not only by delivering from evil or by ordering our external circumstances, but also, and chiefly, by His inward influence on the mind itself, assuaging its tumulus and filling it with joy and peace in believing.3

From the above passages we learn that the believer has God’s unfailing love in all circumstances, whether in good or distressing conditions. Therefore, we may find our true comfort in God alone. Let us, then, humbly place our full reliance and trust in him who is the ultimate source of man’s support, help, and comfort (cf. 2 Cor. 7:6). Indeed, “the failure of earthly comforts and lasting succor points to a need for comfort that only God can satisfy. He is “the Father of compassion and the God of all comfort.” ”4 As we advance into our later years this becomes so very vital! As Fanny Crosby expressed it:

Take the World, but give me Jesus, Sweetest comfort of my soul;
With my Savior watching o’er me, I can sing though billows roll.5

May we, therefore, represent Christ well to all people:

Take the Name of Jesus with you,
Child of sorrow and of woe.
It will joy and comfort give you;
Take it, then, where’er you go.6


1 John F. Walvoord, The Thessalonian Epistles, (Findlay, Ohio: Durham Publishing Co., 1955), p.32.

2 Leon Morris, The First and Second Epistles to the Thessalonians in The New International Commentary on the New Testament, (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1959), p.85.

3 Charles Hodge, An Exposition of the Second Epistle to the Corinthians, (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, n.d.), p.5.

4Comfort” in Dictionary of Biblical Imagery, eds. Leland Ryken, James C. Wilhoit, and Tremper Longman III (Downers Grove, Il: Intervarsity Press, 1998), p. 161.

5 Fanny J. Crosby, “Give Me Jesus”.

6 Lydia Baxter, “Take the Name of Jesus with You”.

Related Topics: Comfort, Suffering, Trials, Persecution

Pages